Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.rte. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. schedules. how to navigate the user interface. and residential. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In the Revit Architecture model. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In this case. and open Metric\Templates. the parameter is one of association or connection. every drawing sheet. you will use the default template. For most tutorial projects. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. 13 Click OK. and customize the project as necessary. drawings. 12 Select DefaultMetric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. drawing sheets. As you work in drawing and schedule views. construction. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. the hierarchy of elements. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and schedules required for a building project. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. sections. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 2D and 3D view. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You learn the terminology. review the Revit Architecture templates. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. If you move the partition. and phases when you need it. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the floor or roof remains connected. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. quantities. the operation of the software is parametric. scope. and plans. and click Open. If the length of the elevation is changed.

For example. and reference planes are datum elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and 2D detail components. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. tags. walls and roofs are hosts. windows. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. They display in relevant views of the model. tags. doors. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. programming is not required. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. If you can draw. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. windows. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. They help to describe or document the model. and cabinets are model components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. walls. levels. dimensions. filled regions. dimensions. and roofs are model elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. doors. Datum elements help to define project context.When you change something. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. grids. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.

families. This information includes components used to design the model. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Often. top of wall. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . However. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. first floor. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. for example. views of the project. Project: In Revit Architecture. In other cases. floors. and so forth). elevation views. section views. schedules. The project file contains all information for the building design. and ceilings. such as roofs. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. from geometry to construction data. and types. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. By using a single project file. for example. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. they are implied by what you do and how you draw.In Revit Architecture. To place levels. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and drawings of the design. you can explicitly control them. Most often. or bottom of foundation.

System families can be transferred between projects. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . For example. In the steps that follow. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and similar graphical representation. and levels. A type can be a specific size of a family.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. specifically its clear user interface. However. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. identical use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. In the following illustration. System families include walls. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. dimensions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. floors. ceilings. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. categories of model elements include walls and beams. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. For example. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. the user interface is labeled. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. A type can also be a style. roofs.

In addition. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. By default. This creates a new project based on the default template.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. click (New). the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.

you type the required key combination to perform the command. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. While working in the drawing area. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. which are listed on the menu. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. and View.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. For example. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Edit. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.

You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. a door type is specified. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. On the left side of the Options Bar. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. For example. when you add a door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.

immediately below the Type Selector. In the drawing area.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

11 Click OK. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select Views (all). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.

families. double-click its name. and group name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. windows). The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and rename views. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. delete. The browser is dockable. 3D). family category (doors. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. walls. families. sheets. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. schedules. elevations. reports. To open a view.

You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Cancel. In this case. The cursor displays as a pencil. In the bottom left corner of the window. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. After creating a browser organization scheme. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. click Wall. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.

HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. in conjunction with tooltips. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. There are several tools that help you find information. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element.18 On the Design Bar. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. When you place the cursor over an element. You can also press SHIFT+F1. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. It highlights when the cursor is over it. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. You can use this tri-pane. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . The status bar also provides information. find a keyword on the Index tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Toolbar: From the toolbar. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. click Modify to end the Wall command. press F1 for context-sensitive help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Click the Help button. Tooltips: To see tooltips. In the status bar. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). click on the Standard toolbar. In addition. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. regarding selected elements in a view. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. 20 Press TAB. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. press F1 for help. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Windows: From any window. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.

you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the building model. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example.rvt. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the following steps. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 On the View toolbar. In the drawing area.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.

To modify or add snap increments. . If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. As you move the mouse. 10 To display SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. When you release the mouse button. on the View toolbar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

bottoms. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and then using the Zoom tool again. When drawing or modifying a building model. called drag controls. and select the wall. expand Floor Plans. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. moving the wheel to the desired location. and double-click 2nd Flr. For more information about SteeringWheels. expand Views (all). press ESC. referred to as shape handles. as shown. display along the ends. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and click Help. Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. These are the drag controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Cnst. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 To exit the wheel. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. Similar controls. 17 Type ZR. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

click to specify the starting position. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. to lengthen the wall. In this case. and on the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. The table moves down. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . such as Move and Copy. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 23 Click next to the lower wall. After selecting the element to move. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. for example. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. click (Move). as shown. Some commands.18 Click and drag the left control.

24 Select the plant. or press CTRL+Z. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. In this example. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click Lines. select the second item in the list. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Some commands. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move. such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the Undo command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and click again to end it. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 26 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

29 To end the command. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

When you have finished these tutorials. this tutorial uses imperial units only. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In this tutorial. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. or referenced as a drafting view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. In Revit Architecture. illustrating how building components work together. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. detail. Use detail components to define an assembly. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. and annotate building assemblies. 27 . but for training purposes. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.

and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 3 In the Scale list. create a reference callout.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. import a DWG detail. If necessary. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. for Name. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. and reference a drafting view. click Drafting View. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. enter Window Head Detail. you will create a drafting view.

click Training Files. select Black and White. as shown. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. and click Open. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. The drawing area is still blank. 10 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. located directly to the left of the drawing area. The model zooms out. 9 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 6 In the Colors field list. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.).In the Project Browser.dwg. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. displaying the extents of the detail. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.

Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click Callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. select Detail View: Detail.The view displays to the specified area. in the Type Selector. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Reference other view. to activate the view selection list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list.The reference callout is created. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. in the Type Selector. adjust the detail view display settings. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.rvt. double-click the reference callout tag head. 2 On the Options Bar. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. select Callout. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly.

select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). 6 In the drawing area. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 Right-click Detail 0.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. enter Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Name. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. and click OK. and click Rename. click Modify to clear the selection.

bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 16 Click OK. for Display Model. select As Underlay. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 14 In the drawing area. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click.

17 On the View Control Bar. Stud. and press ENTER. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. typical details can easily be placed. 20 In the drawing area.Brick on Mtl.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 1' 6''. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. By grouping detail components. 19 In the Type Selector. on the Options Bar. If the crop region is enlarged. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. Directly above the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.

Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. add the following detail components as shown. click Modify to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 23 Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. as shown. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. In the next exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 On the Options Bar. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. in the type selector. click Keynote ➤ Element.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and under Keynote Table. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can customize this list. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. or instructions within a construction documentation package. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple.rvt. click Browse. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and format keynote styles. for Full Path. special notes. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. c_express_workshop_details_start. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. map keynotes by material. Leader. For more information about customizing a keynote database. and Free End are selected. and verify that Horizontal. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 8 Click to place the tag. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 7 Click to place the leader arm.5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command. a question mark displays. Keynoting | 39 . 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. If no value has been specified. Either move the text inside.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. click Keynote ➤ Material. 12 Click to place the leader arm.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 13 Click to place the tag. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 15 Select 07 21 00. 16 In the drawing area. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.

You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.All items within the selection display in red. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Click OK. Click Check None. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .Boxed. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Only the keynotes remain selected. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Select Keynote Tags. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.

Add labels to a title block. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . this tutorial uses imperial units only. and modify and update the project sheet title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Update drawing sheet and project information. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. In this lesson. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. In this exercise.

a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In the Project Browser. 3 Click OK. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.rvt. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. click Training Files. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. If necessary. In Revit Architecture. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . or in the element properties of the title block.

10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Smith and press ENTER. hold down the wheel and drag. 7 Enter K.Unnamed. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. To pan. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. under Sheets(all). enter A602. click Modify to clear the selection. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.4 Type ZR. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 8 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For Name. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. Then. To zoom in and out. roll the wheel. Click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click A602 . 5 In the drawing area. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. double-click Checker. 6 In the Title Block. and click Rename. In this tutorial. enter Sections/Details. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. you can enter ZE to zoom out.

For Client Name. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. in the Type Selector. enter J. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Design Development. For Project Name. (Left) is selected. select Text : 1/8''. The Family Editor opens. 16 Type ZR. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 13 Click OK. enter 4/10/2008. 15 In the Options Bar. click Text. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. Smith. select the title block. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Click and type Project Status. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar.

and verify that (Top) are selected. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. select Label : 3/16''. as shown. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and click. and click OK. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 22 Using the same method. under Category Parameters. as shown. click Label. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. to add 28 Using the same method. in the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. click (Load into Project). select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters.21 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter.

by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.txt. and click Yes. a viewport displays. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. representing the view or schedule. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. click Training Files. for Name. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. to a drawing sheet. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.30 In the Reload Family dialog. you will create. click Browse. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Full Path. and under Keynote Table. In this exercise. place and modify a keynote legend. Next you will create.Project. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. enter Keynote Legend . select Override parameter values of existing types. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.

Sections/Details. on the Appearance tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. expand Legends. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. clear Show Headers. under Sheets (all). as shown. double-click A601 . and drag Keynote Legend . under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. The keynote legend is visible. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown.

14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. under Legends. The Keynote Legend is now blank.Sheet. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. as shown. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. at the bottom of the Filter tab. select Filter by sheet.Project. right-click Keynote Legend . and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Keynote Legend . NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. and click OK. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Edit. 19 Click OK twice. for Filter. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. not keynotes. and click Properties. for View Name. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display.

Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.The keynote legend is automatically updated. under Sheets (all). expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. as shown. and then add and update a Drawing list. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view title with line displays below the viewport. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area.Title Sheet 1.

As part of a construction document set. and zoom in on the drawing list. expand Schedules/Quantities. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 5 In the Project Browser. The drawing list remains selected. You can specify text attributes for view titles. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 3 In the Type Selector.When you place a view on a sheet. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. as shown. 6 Type ZR. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. or omit view titles from sheets. by default. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet.

Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. clear Appears In Drawing List. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets. 8 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views. and click OK. The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. while pressing SHIFT. and click Properties.Ceiling Plans. select A602 . under Sheets (all).

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

or “flex the model” by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. the wall or column will move with it. For example. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. it is good practice to test the constraints. 57 . After the beginning exercises. If the grid moves. a central service core. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. As you develop the building design. a curtain wall.

you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. levels. click New. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. For this project. 5 Click OK. construction. you design inside the elevation markers. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. such as a door or window. views. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. verify that the second option is selected. and settings. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. In practice. In the drawing area in the right pane.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. with an RVT extension. you load any required family type that is not in your project. The project is stored as a single file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. under Create new. under Projects. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. you use a template that is provided with the software. select Project. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. East. West. Creating the Project In this exercise. 3 Under Template file. you will use the default template. notice four elevation markers. from the product library. South. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In views that display elevation markers. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area.rte. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click Browse. To create the project file. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. and residential. locate the Project Browser. and customize the project as necessary. click Training Files. The new project opens. but contains no geometry. 2 In the New Project dialog.

Click Settings menu ➤ Options. duplicate them. display in the south elevation. double-click South. As you design and document your building model.rvt) is selected. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and families in your project. sheets. expand Views (all). and click Training Files. Creating the Project | 59 . Sheets (all). 15 For Save as type. then expand Floor Plans. schedules. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 13 In the file window.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Two level lines. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. created by the template. 10 In the Project Browser. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. the view you see in the drawing area. Schedules/Quantities. 16 Click Save. you will want to save your work frequently. such as schedules and legends. heights. and duplicate levels. and elevation views created in the project by the template. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. notice the Legends. and on the General tab. double-click Metric. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other properties. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. delete. content and building model reports. enter Revit Retail Building. reflected ceiling plan views. Ceiling Plans. You can add. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete them. change their properties. Groups. 8 Under Floor Plans. verify that Project Files (*. 14 For File name. as well as change their names. Families. 7 If necessary. These views are customizable: you can rename them. verify that Level 1 displays as bold.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE If you create a project without a template. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). view the Save reminder interval. will be accessible from the Project Browser.

doors. You learn how the levels are locked. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. After you modify the two default levels. or constrained. Adding Project Levels on page 60. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. When you begin designing. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. and windows within the building model. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .17 Proceed to the next exercise. You change the names of the 2 default levels. and double-click South. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. expand Views (all). to each other. enter 00 Foundation. the other levels move and change with it. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. so that when one level moves. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model.

and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ENTER. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. not all the tabs are visible. This is the Options Bar. As you move the cursor. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. right-click. enter -1800. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. and press ENTER. enter 0. Next. When you add the new level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default. click Level. and click Basics. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and then move it up. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 16 Enter 3750. If it does not. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. and click OK. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Adding Project Levels | 61 . view the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click Plan View Types.

19 Click OK. 27 Rename the level 03 Level.18 In the Project Browser. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. click (Pick Lines). 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. If you create a level by copying it. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and rename the corresponding views. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Next. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. and move it slightly upward. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 21 In the Project Browser. click Rename. using a different option. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click Level. right-click Level 3. 26 Press ESC. under Floor Plans. or on the Design Bar. you add another level. and enter 02 Level. click Modify to end the command. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 23 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. enter 3750. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 25 Click to place the level line.

Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Adding Project Levels | 63 . the levels are no longer constrained. all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. as shown. If you select a level and click its lock. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Notice that by moving the top level. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently.

■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. In the following exercise. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In a later exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. select (Draw). and specify the grid line endpoint. the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. When the grid is complete. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up. specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. On the Design Bar. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser.

click (Pick Lines). On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and press ENTER. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Enter A. and for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. Next. click Grid. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. enter 4500 mm.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm.

click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.8 Press ESC. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. as shown. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. On the Options Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click Grid. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid.

click Dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. select grid lines C and 3. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Dimension. click (Aligned). 22 While pressing CTRL. 15 Starting with grid line A. 14 On the Options Bar. 21 Press ESC twice. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 18 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.

29 In the Name dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 26 In the drawing area.5mm Bubble with Gap. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip up. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click Edit/New. 32 Click OK twice. until it is closer to grid line A. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. If necessary. and press ESC. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. By pinning these central grid lines. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line 5. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. and press ESC. 24 Press ESC. Two pins display on the grid lines. enter 6. click Duplicate. 31 For End Segments Length. select grid line 5. click . (Element Properties). The pins are hidden. 33 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click Modify. and click OK. and select None. click Modify. enter 50mm. and select grid line A.

click Structural Column. select Grid : 6. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden.5mm Bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 36 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. and in the Type Selector. For Place By. click (Grid Intersection). click Finish. 35 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6.5mm Bubble with Gap. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). click Modify.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. The original continuous grid lines are restored. and press ESC. 37 Select the grid lines again. select all of the grid lines.

The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 43 Press ESC. If it is unlocked. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. double-click 01 Entry Level. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 46 On the Options Bar. and unlock it. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. select grid line A. 52 On the Options Bar. 45 While pressing CTRL. lock it. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. Next. 48 On the Standard toolbar. select 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 47 Enter 9000. and press ENTER. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. click Activate Dimensions. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. for From. click Camera.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. The current view. and click Rename.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. Adding Beams In this exercise. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. expand 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). displays in bold under 3D Views. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and then copy them to subsequent levels. When you finish adding beams. enter To Building. Adding Beams on page 72. named 3D View 1 by default. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Right-click 3D View 1. you add beams to build the structure of the building model.

view the icons on the View Control Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 4 Click Medium. 9 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry Level. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. Adding Beams | 73 . 10 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. select each grid line. under Floor Plans. click Beam. click Finish. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . click (Create Beam On Grid). A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 6 In the Type Selector. the icon on the right side of the scale. The view is currently set to Coarse. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser.

which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press and hold SHIFT. 13 On the Design Bar. right-click. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 Select one of the beams. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. select 02 Level. and click Select All Instances. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. click (Default 3D View). The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. select 06 Roof. and click OK. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. double-click To Building. 06 Roof. right-click. under Instance Parameters. and if necessary. Adding Beams | 75 . You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. resize the view to see the entire structure. under Constraints. and click OK. (Element Properties). 21 With the column selected. and click Select All Instances. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. right-click. and click Element Properties. select 06 Roof. When you created the columns. view the Top Level parameter. 25 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. click 24 Press ESC. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Level. 20 Click Cancel. under 3D Views. The columns now extend to the top level of the building.to the 5th level. All of the columns display as red.

press ESC to exit the command before continuing. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 28 Save the drawing. as lines only. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. under Elevations. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click South. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. but you want to display them in less detail.

2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. Adding Braces | 77 . Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. click Framing Elevation. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces on page 77. To better add the braces to the structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ESC to end the command. you create 8 framing elevation views. verify that Attach to Grid is selected.

verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. After you add the final brace. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 7 On the Design Bar. but when placed the braces are placed. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 11 Using the same technique. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and when the endpoint snap displays. The associated framing elevation view displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. click Brace. press ESC twice. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click to specify the start point of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 8 In the Type Selector. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. double-click the elevation marker arrow.

The height of the roof lowers. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. enter 10000 mm. but this time add them from right to left. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. under Floor Plans. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

enter 12000 mm.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. NOTE As you add braces. Adding Braces | 81 . open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 21 Select grid line A. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). as shown in the 3D view below. click Activate Dimensions. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected.

grid size. beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. under 3D Views. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. under Floor Plans. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm.24 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 26 In the Project Browser. lock it. double-click South. and drag it away from the structure. click and roof height. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. Creating a Foundation on page 82. under Elevations. 31 Save the drawing. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. Test connectivity of the columns. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the Standard toolbar. and if necessary. 29 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure.

and click View Properties. and drag it to the drawing area. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for View Range. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. expand Families. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Extents. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click Edit. under Floor Plans. and how to load specific families into a project. In the View Range dialog. The foundation pile cap now displays. The pile cap has been added in the view.rfa. and press ESC twice. 9 Close the warning dialog. After you load the pile cap family. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. for Level. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser.Before you can add the pile caps. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. Creating a Foundation | 83 . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. select Unlimited. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. In the Element Properties dialog. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click Training Files. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. A warning displays. double-click 00 Foundation. and expand Structural Foundations. Click OK twice. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. under View Depth.

double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. beam. and braces that you used to create the building structure.rvt. All columns in the building model display as red. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. beams. and click Select All Instances. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and brace families into the project. You load new column. right-click. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. under 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . double-click {3D}. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the types of the columns. 2 Select one of the columns.

and changing its size parameter. click (Element Properties). Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Modify. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. 6 In the Type Selector. the braces as well as the beams change. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. The brace type changes. you change the brace type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click (Default 3D View). Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select M_Round Bar: 75mm.5CHS. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type.3 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog.2X101. and click OK twice. for Type.6X15. double-click Elevation 1-a. 19 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. The building model displays the round hollow columns. enter 75mm. 9 In the Type Selector. for d. click Modify. click Modify. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. right-click. In the following steps. 10 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 15 In the Project Browser. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 4 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .9. click Edit/New. enter 75mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Brace. click Duplicate. but it is the only size of its type currently available. This not the size that you want to use. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.rvt.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. 3 Under Positioning. click Training Files. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and click Open. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file.Origin to Origin.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. select m_RRB_structure_complete. select Auto . After the files are linked.

select the linked Revit model. 6 In the drawing area. under Elevations. select Multiple. double-click South. depending on the project. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. and walls could also be copy/monitored. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. Grids. select Levels 00 through 06. however. while pressing CTRL. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. and click Select Link. click (Copy/Monitor). You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the link is established. In this case. click Copy. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. structural members.4 In the Project Browser.

click Finish. click Finish mode. First. delete the Level 2 floor plan. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. for Floor Plan views. under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Delete. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information.10 On the Options Bar. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . The 06 Roof floor plan opens. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). while pressing SHIFT. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. click OK. 18 Using the same method. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 15 In the New Plan dialog. right-click Level 1. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 16 Click OK. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser.

right-click. double-click 01 Entry Level. select the Topography : Surface. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK.19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 26 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. right-click. click OK. 25 In the View Templates dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 24 In the New View Template dialog.

adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Camera. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. and click OK. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. select Floor Plans. under Names.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. and click OK.35 In the Project Browser. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Floors on page 92. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand 3D Views. stairs. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and railings are also created from sketches. To create floors. and click Rename. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as roofs.rvt. 36 In the Rename View dialog. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In this exercise. Adding Floors In this exercise.

Move the cursor to the left. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Do not lock the dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Leave this dimension unlocked. click Floor. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click Lines. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. past the first vertical grid line. click (Rectangle). select the top floor line. On the Options Bar. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. double-click 01 Entry Level. and elements in the current view display as gray. click Dimension. If the grid changes size. and then the first horizontal grid line.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 93 . and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. On the Sketch tab.

Select and lock the dimensions. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. press ENTER. Do not lock the dimensions. and click the temporary dimension value. and change their values to 300 mm. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Enter 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. and then press ESC. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. click Modify. At the top left corner of the grid.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. select the top floor line.

and lock the dimensions. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Lines. click Quit Sketch. double-click 02 Level. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. click Floor. and press ESC. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. On the Sketch tab. Next. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. enter 1500mm. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. On the Options Bar. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click (Pick Lines). and on the Options Bar. using a different sketching technique. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. Adding Floors | 95 .8 Select the floor. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. on the Design Bar.

The 02 Level floor displays. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Sketch tab. click (Align). click Floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. and a lock icon displays. click Finish Sketch. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. click Lines. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 18 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar. double-click 03 Level.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line.

dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 32 Select the floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the edges. under Floor Plans. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and click OK. double-click {3D}. Adding Floors | 97 . Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. select 05 Roof Garden. Alternatively. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

Adding a Roof on page 98. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Click (Pick Lines). click Lines. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. enter 1800 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. double-click 06 Roof. When a blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to place the roof line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. To create the roof. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ENTER. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab.rvt. under Floor Plans.

6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 99 . for Offset. and when the blue dashed line displays. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm.

and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. select the roof. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .10 Press ESC. click (Trim/Extend).

Adding a Roof | 101 . 15 On the Options Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. for Elevation. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. 17 On the Design Bar. on grid D.14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. and click to specify the section. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click Section. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. enter -100 mm. click (Add new points to the slab shape).

for Structure. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). select the roof. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. and on the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. select Variable. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In section. click Edit. click Modify. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click Edit/New. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 06 Roof. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Structure [1]. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. under Floor Plans.20 On the Design Bar. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 30 Click OK 3 times. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. under Construction.

and press DELETE. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 40 In the Type Selector. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click OK. zoom in to the roof. 33 In the warning dialog. moving counter-clockwise. select each edge. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. select the section line. click (Default 3D View). You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 37 If necessary. select Fascia : Fascia . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. In this case.Roof Edge. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 38 In the 3D view. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand.31 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Adding a Roof | 103 . 41 Starting with the left front edge. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. on the View Control Bar.

you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. so if you resize the grid. click Modify. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.42 On the Design Bar. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. double-click To Building. the curtain wall resizes with it. under 3D Views.

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click 01 Entry Level. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. for Spacing. for Type. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Offset. enter 2100 mm. under Floor Plans. enter 1050 mm. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click to place the first curtain wall segment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Edit/New. click Training Files. For Level. and click OK. for Spacing. Under Construction. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . The type is saved in the project.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. When you duplicate a type. for Join Condition. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click Duplicate. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. For Height. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 3 In the Type Selector. select 05 Roof Garden. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 600 mm. select 01 Entry Level. enter Retail Storefront. Click OK twice.

click (Trim/Extend). These dimensions are not in a sketch. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you can delete the dimensions. double-click To Building. and trim each curtain wall segment. click Dimension. If you want to hide them. so they remain in the view. under 3D Views. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimensions. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. If the grid moves. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Creating an Entrance on page 107.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Do not select Columns. 6 Under Visibility. and click None. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. All the elements in the list are selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. clear one element to clear all the elements. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. under the element list. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. click All. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 7 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 5 Under Visibility. To better work with the curtain wall panels.

and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. press and hold CTRL. Creating an Entrance | 109 . select System Panel : Solid. 12 With the panels selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. and click OK. select Architectural Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser.9 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. in this case an architectural elevation. under 3D Views. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 10 Select 1 panel. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in the Type Selector. 18 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}.

21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click To Building. double-click South. 20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under 3D Views.

click Add or Remove Segments. click Curtain Grid. click Modify.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 32 In the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 24 On the Options Bar. select One Segment. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. and unpin it. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. and click to select it. select another mullion to the right.

34 On the View toolbar. and unpin it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select it. press TAB until it is selected. click (Default 3D View). 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.

Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. open the North elevation. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.38 Press DELETE. 39 Using the same process. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 40 Optionally.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and click View Properties. click Training Files. 5 Click OK. for Underlay. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Right-click in the view. under Graphics. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 02 Level. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.

Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. which indicates you must draw the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. under Floor Plans. and click to complete the callout. 9 In the Project Browser. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. enter Display Area. click Callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 8 Select the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog.

16 Select the section box. 14 Press ESC. right-click. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Draw a section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and click Flip Section. as shown. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 13 Select the section line.

Lock both alignments. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser.135mm Partition (2-hr). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 18 In the Rename View dialog. expand Sections (Building Section). Click (Rectangle). For Loc Line. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Wall. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . click (Align). 25 Press ESC twice. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 21 In the Type Selector. and click Rename. right-click Section 1. select Finish Face: Exterior. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select Basic Wall : Interior . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Wall faces.17 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). enter Section Display Area. click Dimension.

118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.) 36 Press ESC twice. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the View Control Bar. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Next. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 32 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Building Section). double-click Section Display Area. 37 In the Project Browser. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. and lock the dimension.

for Height Offset From Level. click to select it. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. under Constraints. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and press ESC. under Sections. double-click Section Display Area. Select the 02 Level Floor. 47 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Press ESC. click Modify. 43 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. enter 2700 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and click (Element Properties). under Ceiling Plans. under Constraints. for Base Offset.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . enter 2700 mm. click Attach. and click to select the walls. for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. 41 On the Options Bar.

49 In the Project Browser. for Structure. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. under Ceiling Plans. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. 54 Click OK. click (Rotate). click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. view the ceiling structure. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . click Cancel. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction.

enter 45. 61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. and press ENTER.

copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 64 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows Off. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows On. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 66 Optionally.

click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and for Offset. double-click 01 Entry Level.rvt. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Move the cursor over grid line B. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and copy it to the 05 Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click Ref Plane. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and click to create a reference plane to the left.

9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C. and 3. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. click Modify. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 6 Select the left reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2. 7 Using the same method. click Stairs. shorten the right reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . click Wall. Click (Rectangle). and specify a point. beyond the end of the stair. Move the cursor down. and select the 2nd reference plane. 12 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. 10 On the Options Bar. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. select Basic Wall : Generic . Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. including its handrails.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left.225mm Masonry.

align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. click Align. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. enter 1200 mm. Lock the dimension. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. for Prefer. 18 Using the same technique. select Wall faces. Select the wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. Select the bottom of the stair. click Dimension. select the dimension value. Select the interior face of the wall. and press ENTER. and specify a point away from the wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Click Modify. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the alignment. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it.

24 On the Standard toolbar. click Door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. 23 Select the stair. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press DELETE. (Undo). and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . clear Tag on Placement. 27 In the Type Selector.21 Select the dimension. 25 While pressing CTRL. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. a warning displays. select both reference planes. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. The stair and walls move to the left. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. TIP To flip the door swing.

33 Select the stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Default 3D View). (Rectangle). 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. click 36 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. select 05 Roof Garden. click Align. For Top Constraint. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button.30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. but if you view the top level of the building. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). select all 4 walls. Click OK. click Modify. for Multistory Top Level. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. Under Constraints. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. select 00 Foundation. 44 On the Tools toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. for Base Constraint. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. (Element Properties). click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 35 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans.

46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. click (Default 3D View). click see the roof. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. on the View toolbar. and lock the alignment. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 .

and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (Default 3D View). By offsetting the base. enter 300 mm. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click OK. click 59 On the View toolbar. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. (SteeringWheels). you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 56 Select the shaft. under Floor Plans. for Base Offset. For Top Constraint. double-click 01 Entry Level. Under Constraints.55 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wall.rvt. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . under Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 06 Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click OK. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. for Underlay.

6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. select Elevation: South. 16 On the Design Bar. click Remove Constraints. and click (Fillet arc). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. The exact placement is not important. and click Open View. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 11 In the Go To View dialog. click Edit Profile. enter 9750. 17 On the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and press ENTER. and then select the right face of the wall. and on the Options Bar. click . 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 7 On the Tools toolbar. select Basic Wall : Generic .5 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.225mm Masonry. click Lines. 15 In the error dialog.

20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. double-click {3D}. click . 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 22 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. and click (Circle). under 3D Views. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 3 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. click Component. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 5 On the Basics tab. select M_RPC Tree . under Floor Plans.rvt. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 6 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. between grid lines C and D. click Training Files. as shown.4. and press ESC twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. TIP After you place the 1st planter.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .5 Meters.

18 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.8 On the View toolbar. and in the Type Selector. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. click Duplicate. 21 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and then click OK twice. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Height. 14 In the Name dialog. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. for Type. double-click {3D}. select the 2 remaining trees. enter Japanese Cherry 1. as shown. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. (Element Properties).5 Meters. 10 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). click Lines. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. under Dimensions. 17 While pressing CTRL. enter 2400 mm. click Floor. View the roof. 16 Click Apply. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. For Offset.5 Meters. select M_RPC Tree .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 11 Select one of the trees.

sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. and click to place the line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 25 Using the same method. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. click (Draw). enter 0 mm. for Offset. 29 On the Options Bar.

click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor up 900 mm. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B.30 On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 Press ESC. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew.

48 In the Type Selector. When you render an image. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 45 Click OK. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 49 On the Options Bar. Next. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . click Component. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. enter Sidewalk. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. enter -250 mm. 42 In the Name dialog. 43 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. The completed sidewalk displays. for Height Offset from Level. near Column E5. a photorealistic image displays. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). and click so he is facing the column. click Duplicate. select Rotate after placement. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. In plan view.38 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 52 In the Type Selector. 56 Press ESC twice. and click (Element Properties). about 30 degrees. select M_RPC Beetle.NOTE If necessary. click the car. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 54 In the Type Selector.

double-click To Building. Next. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 63 Click the sidewalk. If the sidewalk changes height. When you select a host for a component. double-click West. for Offset. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. and on the Options Bar. 64 Select Alex.59 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and click OK. under Elevations. 65 Click the sidewalk. 60 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . and on the Options Bar. 66 Using the same method. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. click Pick Host. enter -300 mm. click Pick Host.

and replace them with a service core.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

rvt. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. and shaft opening. you delete the entire stairwell. walls.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Default 3D View). By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. including the stairs. (SteeringWheels). double-click 05 Roof Garden. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.

and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. right-click m_RRB_core. click Modify. 13 In the drawing area. and notice that the linked file is listed.rvt. double-click 00 Foundation. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and on the Design Bar.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and zoom in to the linked instance. 10 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Groups. click (Align). expand Model. 11 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level.

or if the group layout is expected to change. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and on the Options Bar. click Ungroup. 17 On the Design Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View toolbar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 18 Select the core. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. (Default 3D View). click Modify. click Modify. click (top down view). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. ■ ■ Click grid line C. (SteeringWheels). 19 On the Design Bar.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. where it is hosted within a railing family.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. After you modify it. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt.

press and hold CTRL. click OK.rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and select Glass. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. The rendering displays. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and open Metric\m_Conference. click (Split). click Edit. and Parapet. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. in the Project Browser.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and expand Railings. expand Renderings.rvt. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. double-click 02 Level. 3 In the Conference project. expand Families. and click to split the floor. and on the Options Bar. Handrail only. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The floor sketch displays. 5 Expand Railing. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C.

18 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Lines. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. click Modify. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm.15 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to draw another line. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 25 Select grid line B. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click (Align). and click the lock to lock the alignment. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click to draw another line.

28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 27 On the Tools toolbar.rvt project. 31 In the Revit dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.26 Select grid line D. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. Lock the dimensions. for Type. click (Align). click Finish Sketch. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. enter 100 mm. For Offset. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. click Railing Properties. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click the lock to lock the alignment. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. select Glass. and lock the alignment.

150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .37 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. lofty ceilings. slight modifications to the building design have been made. exterior fire stairs. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. NOTE For training purposes. and a roof garden. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. 153 . As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009.

154 .

elevation. including plan. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. 155 . how to create section and elevation views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. section. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.

9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Level 2. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click the current scale. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Next. 11 Under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. 16 Right-click.

rvt. under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:100. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Type Selector. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Elevation. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Building Elevation.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .

■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans. enter South East. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). select 1:100. and double-click Level 1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 In the Rename View dialog. select Section: Building Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. double-click South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. click Section.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. click Split Segment. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

expand Sections (Building Section). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 .21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. using the blue circular drag grip. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

for Scale. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.rvt. Creating Callout Views | 167 .Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. select Floor Plan. select 1:50. double-click Level 1.Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. and select the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK.7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1:50. click Modify. select Detail View: Detail. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 169 . under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Section 1. for Scale. click Callout. 13 In the Type Selector. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog.

rvt. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. double-click Level 1. select Custom-Section Head. click Training Files.rfa. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. open Metric\Families\Annotations. You change the appearance of the section mark head. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Open. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

for Section Head. 4 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and select 3. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 19 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab.5mm Square. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. clear any others. and click OK twice. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and can be applied to the section line. 8 In the Name dialog. scroll to Section Line. 15 Under Category.Filled. Section Tail – Filled. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. On the floor plan. select the section line. . 22 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 10 On the floor plan. select the current project.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. enter Section Head – Custom. enter 12. and click OK. Section Tail . scroll to Section Marks. click Duplicate. 17 Under Category. 12 For Section Tag. click Load into Project. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. select Section Head . 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Custom. and select 2. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.

24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 30 On the Design Bar. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Edit/New. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Line Weight. click Load into Project. Click OK. and click OK.23 In the Type Properties dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. select Square. and on the Options Bar. select the callout. for Elevation Tag. . for Callout Tag. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New.5mm Square. clear all others. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.rfa. . 40 Press ESC. 36 In the drawing. and on the Options Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.5 mm. click Training Files. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 27 Click OK twice. and click OK. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select 12. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. Click OK. select the current project. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter 12. and click Open. select Custom-Callout Head. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter 6 mm. select 3. On the floor plan. For Corner Radius. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. masking regions. select Dash. click the Annotation Objects tab. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. expand Callout Boundary. scroll down to Callout Boundary. view regions.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. You learn to create view templates. and visual overrides. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. filters. and select 4. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 43 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 46 Under Category. and select 7. 49 Click OK. 45 For Line Pattern.

you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Show Crop Region). 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 5 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations.rvt. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. and double-click East. To accomplish this. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Zoom to Fit. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.

clear Entourage. Callouts. Creating a View Template | 177 . clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. under Visibility. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. levels. elevation markers. 13 On the View Control bar. and section lines are now hidden in the view. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 11 Under Visibility. grids.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar.

17 In the Project Browser. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click East. click OK. and click Apply View Template.rvt. click Apply. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. under Elevations. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 20 Using the same method. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. double-click North. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Create View Template From View. edit the crop region as before. right-click North. 15 In the New View Template dialog.

right-click. click Edit. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. for Level. Click OK twice. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Under View Depth. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level Below (Level 4). as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. under Extents. for Bottom. and click Properties.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. double-click Penthouse.

click Edit. Click OK twice. and click Properties. select Level 4. for Level. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Roof Plan. Under View Depth. under Extents. for View Range. right-click. select Level 4. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser.

NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. select Unlimited.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. for Level. In the left corner of the building. Under View Depth. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. select Unlimited. Move you cursor diagonally. for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Lines. click Edit. under Extents. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 11 On the Options Bar. Click OK twice. 10 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region.

click the Filters tab. in this case. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.17 On the Design Bar. After you apply the filter. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire rating of the walls. under Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and double-click Level 1. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Filters. and click OK. 14 In the Color dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. select Walls. Select contains. 5 In the Filters dialog. and apply a color. for Pattern. click OK. for Color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click Remove. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. select Fire Rating. for Rated Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. 17 Using the same method. Enter Hr. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select the red color. under Categories. 9 Click OK. 16 Click OK. select Solid Fill. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 10 On the Filter tab. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click (New). 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. under Basic colors. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. and click OK. enter Rated Walls. click <No Override>. 12 On the Filter tab. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Add. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 11 Select Rated Walls.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Rename. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. select Invisible lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 11 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 On the View menu. and click OK. right-click. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Select the crop region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Masking Region. as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 4 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click black. right-click Unit 18 Plan . under Visibility. click <No Override> to apply a color. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 4 On the View Control Bar. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. select Solid fill. 7 Under Cut. right-click. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Rename.rvt.Level 1. under Floor Plans. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click in the Patterns field. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click Override. for Pattern. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 11 Click OK twice. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click the current scale. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click 1: 50. for Color. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click OK.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. clear Floors. click Modify. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

click Override. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select the sofa. click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. select Dash. 23 In the Color dialog. 25 Click OK twice. By using the previous method to make the selection. under Lines. right-click. for Pattern. click <No Override> to apply a color. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click a purple color. for Color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 21 Under Projection/Surface.20 Right-click. and click OK.

and click OK twice. 32 Select one of the lamps. right-click. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.28 For Color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 29 In the Color dialog. click By Category Override. click Modify. click .

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click . Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. click Training Files.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . select A0 metric.Creating Sheets. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

enter A101. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 When the title block highlights. 3 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Name. Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. For Sheet Number. click Modify. on the Options Bar. enter Site Plan. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101.

14 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. enter For Approval. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Status. For Project Number. For Client Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. For Project Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 15 May. Smith. MA 12345 12 Click OK. under Other. enter 2009-1. enter J. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 2009.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.

Elevations A107 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A105 . and click Save.Stairs In the following exercise. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A106 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. for Name. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. and click OK. right-click. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Layout Plan A104 .rvt. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . and click OK. select the new sheet name.Sections A108 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to these sheets. enter Floor Plan. and click Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. select A0 metric.

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .rvt. under Sheets (all). select Level 1. and click to place the view. 6 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Sheets (all). Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A104 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click A102 . under Floor Plans.Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it.Floor Plan. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

under Sheets (all). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. double-click A107 . align it with the East elevation. click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar.Sections. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and click to place it.

for View Scale. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . select 1:5. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. . and on the Options Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and click OK. move the cursor over it. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and press TAB until it highlights. zoom in to the grip. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.

click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A108 . View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click to place it. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Sheets (all).Stairs. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 Under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

In order to do this. under Sheets (all).Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.Sections. you must first activate the view on the sheet. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt. enter 16700 mm. 2 Select the building section view. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . and press ENTER.

and click Deactivate View. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Right-click. After you create the sheet. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. You modify the view to hide the view title. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Elevations (Building Elevation). you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. double-click North.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

Click OK. enter Title Sheet. and click Properties. right-click. 7 Place the camera as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the new sheet name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. For Sheet Name. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. The camera view displays. select A0 metric. double-click Level 1. enter T. click Camera. under Floor Plans.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .

8 On the Options Bar. Under Extents. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. select Far Clip Active. For Target Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. For Far Clip Offset. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. Under Camera. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 100000 mm. enter 18000 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Eye Elevation. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. double-click T .Title Sheet. Click OK. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. under Sheets (all). enter 1500 mm.

. select Scale (locked proportions). click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. 24 Click OK twice. click Size. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Modify. click Edit/New. Under Model Crop Size. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. under Graphics. 25 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. on the Options Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet.15 With the view selected. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. and click OK. for Show title. select No. Click Apply. and on the Options Bar. enter 635 mm. 22 In the Name dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

such as room and window schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. Tagging Objects In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. click Training Files.Level 1. such as doors and windows. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.rvt. 207 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Because of the open style floor plan. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.

right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. click Room Separation. move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Using the same method.

6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load.

and click to place the room and tag. and press ENTER. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. type 2400 mm. click Room. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and select the room tag. indicating that it can be edited.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 16 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click it. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 14 For Offset.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Modify.

click Room. 19 On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. Click to place the new room and tag. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Modify.18 Click the room text label. place rooms and tags. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. type Entry. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. 22 Click the room text label. Dining.

28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. under Floor Plans. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. and click OK. and moving clockwise. The rooms are already placed. on the Model Categories tab. click Room Tag. clear Room Separation. but they need to be tagged.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.Level 1. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The room Number is U17-46. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. for Name. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 103. for room 101. For 105. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 101-106. add 5 more rooms. type Building Entry.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Storage. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. select Corridor. For 102. select Storage. and press ENTER. click New. type Corridor. For 104. and press ENTER.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. place rooms from a program list. click Override. click the Color field.rvt. under Projection/Surface. under Floor Plans. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. For Room Separation. and press ENTER. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Line Graphics dialog. 13 Save the file. click the bright green swatch. and click OK. under Visibility. Under Custom colors.■ For 106. expand Lines. In the Lines field. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . For Weight. type Stair. double-click Level 1. click the Lines field. select 9. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and modify room names. 4 Click OK twice. you add room separation lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.

6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. draw the horizontal line. First. click Modify. click Room Separation. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 .

11 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). type 2400 mm. select 102 Storage. for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. select 101 Building Entry.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset.

Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. place the following rooms. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 16 Using the same method. and zoom in to the Corridor. 20 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities.

28 In the Schedule Properties dialog.21 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. and for all 3 finishes. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. click 23 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. select Base Finish. while pressing CTRL. type Units. Floor Finish. type As Selected. under Available fields. (Element Properties). and Wall Finish. for Rows. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 Select Schedule keys. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click New. select Rooms. click Modify. under Constraints. 24 Open the Room Schedule. and click Add. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. under Category. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

43 In the Filter dialog. 44 On the Options Bar. select Room Style. for Available fields. under Identity Data. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. select Rooms. under Schedules/Quantities. 33 In the Project Browser. 37 Open the Room Schedule. select Units. click (Element Properties). for Fields. 42 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . for Room Style. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1. and click Add. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 36 Click OK twice. select Units. and click OK.32 Using the same method. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Other. right-click Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. click Edit. and click OK. 38 Under U17-8.

and apply it to the Level 1 view. under Graphics. 9 In the Project Browser. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. under Floor Plans. for Color. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the Color Scheme field. at the warning prompt. select Service. right-click Level 1.rvt.46 Open the Room Schedule. for Name. and click OK. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. (Duplicate). Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 104. and 106. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. click 5 For Title. For rooms 102 and 105. and click Properties. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Room Style. click OK. type Room Type. type Room Type. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Public. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 48 Save the file.

13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Visibility. click Edit. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. expand Lines. 14 Click OK twice. select the color legend. clear Visible. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Room Type. click the value in the Color column. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). and clear Room Separation. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and click OK.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit Color Scheme. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. under Schemes. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 .

change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 24 Click OK. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 30 On the Design Bar. for Swatch Width. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 5 mm. and click OK. under Graphics. click Edit/New.22 In the Color dialog. on the Options Bar. click Modify. (Element Properties). 29 Click OK twice. for Size. under Custom color. 23 Using the same method. 28 Under Title Text. type 25 mm. select blue. respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog.

37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. double-click Building Section. right-click Building Section. under Graphics. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. select Room Type. under Sections. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. and select Properties. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . select Rooms. under Visibility. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. for Color Scheme. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 35 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Edit. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section.

under Identity Data. 46 Click . select Rooms.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. and click OK. for Room Style. click . 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. (Filter Selection). select Units. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. click Check None. select Public. 41 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data.

under Identity Data. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 51 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. and click . excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. double-click Room Style Schedule. type Suites. and click OK. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. click New. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rows. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. select Service. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . for Room Style.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser.

The color fill extends to the roof. and click OK. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. select Suites. select the room on the left side of the top floor. verify that At wall finish is selected.55 Click . and click OK. select Areas and Volumes. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. for Room Style. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Volume Computations. 59 Under Room Area Computation. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Identity Data. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. but not beyond it. The color fill will extend to the roof.

select Loft. and click 65 For Limit Offset.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level.0. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . under Constraints. . 64 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 71 Click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK. select Level 2. the dining room. select the stairwell room. for Upper Limit. 70 For Limit Offset. 68 Click . type -254 mm. under Constraints. type 0. and the living room. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 67 On the first level. for Upper Limit. 72 On the Design Bar.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.73 Save the file. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.

7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Roofs. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Description. For Then by. click Modify. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Family and Type.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under Category. 3 While pressing CTRL. 4 In the Type Selector. under Available fields. 9 Using the same method. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. and click OK. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Clear Itemize every instance. click Family and Type. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Add.EPDM. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Select Grand totals.

17 Click Calculated Value. select Calculate totals. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Currency. and click Add. 19 For Type. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. click Edit. and click OK twice. select Calculate totals. 21 Click OK. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. under Available fields. for Name. for Material: Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.40 50. and under Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and click Properties. for Fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). under Other. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. type Estimated Cost. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. click Estimated Cost. 23 For Field formatting. select Material: Area. click the Formatting tab. select Material: Cost. Under Field formatting. 20 For Formula. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.

Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. 29 Select Use digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 27 In the Format dialog. Digit grouping. 31 Save the file. and reporting the shared parameters. The cost fields are formatted correctly. which inserts commas after every three digits. You draw a travel path line. for Currency. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. In this lesson. can be used for any number-based parameter. 30 Click OK twice. click the Format value. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 26 In the Project Units dialog. tag the line. 28 For Unit symbol. select $. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. not just for currency. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. regardless of category. adding the shared parameters to a family. either within family components or within the project template. for Rounding. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and schedule the total distance of each path. creating a generic tag to tag the family. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. you create an exiting plan for the building. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and are defined and stored in an external file. you create a shared parameter file.

4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Name. 9 Under Parameters. for File name. click New. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. click Training Files. and click OK. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type Path ID. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. for Type of Parameter. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. type Travel Distance. type OfficeStandardsParameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 Under Parameters. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. type Exiting. click Create. for Name. under Groups.rvt. click New.txt. select Length. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.

The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. 8 Select Instance. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Travel Distance Formula. group it under Dimensions. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. in the Load into Projects dialog. type Length. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . under Parameter Type. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 3 On the Design Bar.rfa. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.rvt. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. click Add. and select Instance. 13 Click Apply. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Dimensions. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Click Training Files. and click Select.rvt. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK. and click OK. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Add. select Shared parameter.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 If necessary. If you have multiple projects open. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Parameters. under Parameters. click Load into Projects. for Group parameter under. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. following the equals symbol (=). under Parameter Data. 10 Using the same method. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.

and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Label. click parameter(s) to label). select Travel Distance. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Category Parameters. click Select. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. click Training Files. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. click (Add Parameter).rft. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

and click Save. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. type M_Travel Distance Tag. click Load into Projects. 29 In the drawing window. 35 Save the file. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. select Path ID.rvt is selected. and move it down. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog.rfa. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Modify.28 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and press DELETE. for File Name. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. above the exterior door as shown.rvt. After the lines are tagged.Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right.Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.Tagging. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. click Component. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the center of the corridor. 4 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Chain.

10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. through the door. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 13 While pressing CTRL. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Level 2. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. and click (Element Properties). type 1-1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click outside of the building. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging.7 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines. move the cursor near the right corner. double click Exiting Plan . Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Component. 8 On the Design Bar.

and click. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left.

32 In the New Schedule dialog. for Path ID. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. type 2-1. . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 33 For Name. 30 Using the same method. 27 On the Design Bar. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 On the Design Bar. under Category. click Modify. click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. Placing. and click OK.Tagging. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.

45 In the Rename View dialog. for Filter by. while pressing CTRL. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select contains. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in the second field. select Path ID. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. for Filter. and click Properties. and click Rename. type 1-. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 36 For Filter by. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities.rvt. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. type 2-. select Travel Distance. in the first field. 43 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 50 Save the file. select Path ID. 42 Click OK. click Training Files.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. 46 In the Project Browser. 38 For Sort by. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and under Field formatting. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and in the third field. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the third field. under Available fields. 44 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 49 Click OK twice. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click OK. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. under Other. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Partitions . under Identity Data.Fixed Partitions.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Interiors ➤ C10 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click Properties. click the Value field. and click OK. and select C1010145 .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . under Categories. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 10 In the schedule. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. select Walls. for Assembly Code. right-click Generic . expand C . select the following fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .152 mm. 9 Click OK twice. and click View.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . right-click the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Under Available fields.

you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. type Revit_Project.mdb). select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and click Next. 8 In the New Database dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 9 Under Directories. click Create. click OK. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.11 Close the exercise file.mdb. the database display may be different than that shown. select a location for the database file. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click Next.rvt. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. for Database Name. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the File Data Source tab. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 1 On the File menu. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database. 3 Click New. and click OK to create the database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 6 Click Finish. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. in addition to the Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 13 Close the exercise file. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Additionally. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

262 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. 263 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. In the callout view. plywood. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. In order to detail from the building model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 297 . like a standard door header condition. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. add detail components. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. These components display at the required scale.

5 In the alert dialog. After you add components. click Training Files. Exact location is not important. click Detail Component. They are also view specific. and click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. You load detail components. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. as well as detail lines. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area.Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the view of the roof edge. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.rvt. and click OK. select As underlay. The roof overhang detail displays. region objects. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. double-click the detail callout head. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. which means that all detail components. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and insulation objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.

Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. for Pattern ➤ Detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Repeating Detail. 16 Click OK twice. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. 13 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. click Modify. select Corrugated Metal. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 406. 19 On the Design Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 17 In the drawing area. click (Element Properties). and click OK. Detailing the View | 299 .5mm.8 Delete the component. click Edit/New. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

■ ■ Click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. and click Open.rfa. click Detail Component. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Load. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Training Files.

Because you still have several components to load. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 301 . click Training Files. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. you load them as a group from a single file. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 To properly orient the component. 30 In the Type Selector.rvt. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 33 In the Type Selector.

click the Flip instance arrows. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. select Chain. 38 Select the horizontal segment.

40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. as shown. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Detail Component. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. For Offset. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. Detailing the View | 303 . ■ Click Modify. select to near side. enter 140mm. 42 Click Modify.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click Insulation.

45 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. they are view specific. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. and lock the component. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Thin Lines. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. you add lines to your detail. 51 Click Modify. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component.rvt. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 47 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. meaning they display only in this view. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 2 In the Type Selector. Like detail components.

select Medium Lines. as shown. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. select Thin Lines. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).4 Click Modify. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. and clear Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 16 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. When you turn the display model off. select the Penthouse level line. For Offset. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. Click (Pick Lines). 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Vapor Barrier. 22 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and press ENTER. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. select Do not display.18 In the Type Selector. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. enter 10mm. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Thin Lines. right-click. click Detail Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Properties. Adding Detail Lines | 307 .

29 On the Design Bar. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 32 Click Modify. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click Detail Component. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Dimension. Enter the text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. and click to place the dimension. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.

3 In the Rename View dialog. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click OK. and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing .7 Select the dimension line. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. for Suffix. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Text Fields. click Select All Instances. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. (Filter Selection). and click OK. and click Rename. and save the exercise file. enter Typ.rvt. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. enter Roof Overhang Detail . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.. and click the dimension text. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. on the Options Bar. click Roof Overhang Detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating Detail Components on page 310. right-click. select a text note. and press DELETE.Keynotes.

You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 14 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select Medium Lines. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. pressing TAB. and click Open. 16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework.rft. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Type Selector.7 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. select all the coping linework. click Training Files. and selecting the chain. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. while pressing CTRL. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Creating Detail Components | 311 .

Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 23 Using a window. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. you place keynotes on objects. navigate to your preferred location. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File name. click . clear Detail Items. 31 Using the same method used previously. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 25 In the Filter dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. 27 On the Design Bar.18 In the Save As dialog. 22 Click Modify. and click Open. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser.rfa. 30 In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load into Projects. click Detail Component. The original linework remains selected. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click Save. enter Roof Edge. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 28 On the Options Bar. 21 To place the component. click Detail Component. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 26 Press DELETE. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. select the coping. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. delete the underlying linework. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Keynotes view is not the open view. and the component can be placed in the detail. While pressing SHIFT.

click Edit/New. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. Adding Keynotes | 313 . Roof Edge4. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open.B5. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 19mm Plywood. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. In the Keynotes dialog.C1. 6 Click Modify. 63mm Rigid Insulation. (Element Properties). Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. use keynote 07645. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the metal fascia with drip edge.rvt. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 2 In the alert dialog. use keynote 06160. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. click Training Files.D11. For the metal coping. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Keynote ➤ Element. Click to place the leader arm. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.

For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click in the Value column. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 150. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. select Corrugated Metal. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 50 x 300. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 50 x 200. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 06160. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.20 Ga. use keynote 06110.F1. 12 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . FasciaProfile_1. 18 Save the file. click Detail Component.D11. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Keynote the component.D1. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06110.G1. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. using keynote 07460. You do this in order to keynote the component.9 In the Type Properties dialog. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. navigate to 07645. click Keynote ➤ Element.I1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.A8. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. and click .F1.

and click Open. click Load. and click Modify. and click Save. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 24 While pressing CTRL. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. and click Open. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 5 In the drawing area. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. for File name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click (Element Properties). click Load into Projects. click Detail Component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. navigate to your preferred location. 13 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files.rft. select the left end point of the reference line. and select the right end point. click Training Files. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 16 Select the component.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Medium Lines. 22 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify. click Lines. 8 In the Save As dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.rvt. 11 Press DELETE. 6 Lock the line. click Edit/New. 19 In the Name dialog.

38 On the Design Bar. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . against the 19mm plywood. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. enter EPDM Membrane. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 46 Click Modify. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and assign it keynote 06110. 49 With the component selected. on the Edit toolbar. 41 Select the component just added. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click .25 Next. 28 In the Type Selector. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Duplicate. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 47 Select the component. and click . and hidden) used in the view. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 Using the same method used previously. and assign it keynote 07260.A1. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. name the component Air Barrier. and click the lower end at the break line. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. 37 Click OK 3 times. invisible. click (Move). and click . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component.A5. 40 Click Modify. click Edit/New. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. 34 In the Name dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 31 Select the component. and click . click Detail Component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.G1. click in the Value column.

leaving the detail component lines. 52 In the Type Selector. 55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Chain. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

50 x 200 Framing.rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. and assign it keynote 07260. Air Barrier.rfa. select Invisible Lines. name the component Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously.A4. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the Type Selector. 61 In the drawing area. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 68 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. and Vapor Barrier. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 63 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 60 On the Design Bar. select the component. in the Type Selector.

70 Using the method used previously. and press TAB. under Keynote Table. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. name the component Batt Insul. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 3 In the text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 72 Save the file. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.A1. and click .txt.. and press TAB. 71 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07210. The database file opens in a text editor.69 Select the component. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.A9. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Enter 07460. and press ENTER. click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and close the text editor.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. click Browse. add a keynote for the component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.A4.

These details do not update with changes to the building model. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. you learn how to create a drafted detail. and click to place the note. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select all the keynotes. click to place the leader. navigate to 07463. and click OK. 14 Save the file. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. under Path Type. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and click Open. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 9 In the drawing area.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . After you create a drafting view.A1. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 11 Click Modify.txt. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. and click OK. select Absolute.

For Positioning.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click Drafting 1. and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser.Center to Center is selected. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. select Black and White. For Colors. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click Open. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The detail that you import is in DWG format.rvt. select 1 : 5. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.rvt. for Scale. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. The detail is imported as an import symbol. click Training Files. verify that Auto .dwg. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise.

Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. delete the existing value. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Rename dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. click Edit/New. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 5 Click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. and click Properties. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 12 Click OK twice. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.No Reference. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Reference other view. click Rename. for New. 3 On the Options Bar. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Detail . The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. click Modify. double-click A105 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Det. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Save the file.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and double-click the callout. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.Elev. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .No Reference). The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise./Sect. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. The callout is updated with the sheet information. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).

8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Filled Region. . for Name. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 14 Click OK 3 times. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Name. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Duplicate. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. click Edit/New. 11 In the Name dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. enter Gyp. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Board. and click OK. 5 In the Type Selector.

15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 17 Click Modify. click (Draw). 20 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. click .5mm. and enter 20. 19 In the Type Selector. 18 While pressing CTRL. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region. select Wide Lines. click 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.

30 In the Name dialog.Finish. 33 Click OK 3 times.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region. . 29 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. Move the cursor up.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. for Name. select Wood . click Duplicate. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. 24 Select the mirrored region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 25 Click Modify. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click (Rectangle). click Filled Region. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. in the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 38 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 37 On the Design Bar. sketch the new region as shown. click .5mm. 39 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select Medium Lines. verify that the thickness is 19mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click (Align).

click Ref Plane. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 46 On the Tools toolbar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 6mm. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and press ENTER. For Offset. For Offset. and press ENTER.42 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Finish Sketch. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. click 48 Click Modify. 47 Click the reference plane. click Filled Region. (Align).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor right 25mm. enter 0. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and press ENTER. Move the cursor down 305mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Move the cursor left 25mm.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch. For Offset. and click to select the point. Select Chain.

enter 76. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Lines.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. enter 3mm. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 62 Select the left detail line. 61 Click Modify. click Load. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Detail Component. 58 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. and right edges of the door panel region. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 69 Select the bolt. select the height dimension. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. For Offset.rfa. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 65 On the Options Bar. top. 68 Click Modify. and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).2mm.

NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. 74 Select the expansion bolt. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. select Wide Lines. use the images as a guide. click Detail Lines. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . and click Open.70 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Load.rfa. click Detail Component.

85 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 82 Select the rectangle. 80 On the Options Bar. click . click . click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines.78 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror).

click (Mirror). 92 Select the line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click Detail Lines.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select the length dimension. 101 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 103 Add two break lines as shown. enter 3mm. click . 97 On the Options Bar. 99 Click Modify. 95 On the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.

click Dimension. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . using the Drag Text grip. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.5mm Arial. 108 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. and click Modify. and click Modify. 105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 110 Select the dimension line. 107 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.

under Dimension Value. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 113 Under Text Fields. click Dimension. and click the dimension text. for Below. enter See Schedule. 114 Click OK. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter Varies. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.2. 118 Select Modify to end the command.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .5mmArial. and then click the dimension text. select Replace With Text.

126 In the drawing area. select the gypsum board region on the left. and click Modify. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Board.121 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and on the Options Bar. click Text. and click to place the text. 123 Click OK. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 125 In the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. 127 Enter Gyp. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 128 Select the note.

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.

Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. 339 .Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click East. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.rvt.

Hexagon. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 5 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rfa. 8 Select the keynote. click Modify. click Training Files. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. type 1. for Number of Leaders.

type Seal existing doors and insulate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Copy). and click OK. on the Options Bar. for Text. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. under Identity Data.

and click. 18 Using the same method. type Repair existing door surround. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Copy. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 17 Click OK. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. 16 For Tag. 19 With the tag selected. 15 For Text. (Mirror). on the Options Bar. type B. on the Edit toolbar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean exterior brick wall. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Repair as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . 22 Optionally. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Remove all existing windows. using the table as a reference. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

select Tag. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 27 In the column header (text). expand Sheets (all). and click Add. select Exterior Construction Notes. for the value. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click OK. Create. and for Alignment. type Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Appearance tab. for Note block name. type Exterior Construction Notes. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and click Add. type 6 mm. and select Bold. Clean cut and repair wall as required. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Heading. under Available fields. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. Select Text. 26 Click OK. for Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. select Center. for Header text.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. select Tag.Elevations. On the Formatting tab. type Description. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 . format. verify that Arial is selected. 29 In the Project Browser.

rvt. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.31 On the Design Bar. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

and click Add. for Sort by. under Available fields. On the Filter tab.Title Sheet. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. select Sheet Number. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. under Sheets (all). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type T. double-click T . 6 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by. in the second field. 5 In the list title field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Select Sheet Name. in the first field. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. ■ 4 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. select does not equal. select Sheet Index. and in the third field. The drawing list displays. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List.

building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. click Modify. Training File Using Legends | 347 . On construction documents. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Finally. and so on). 11 Save the file. door frame schedule. For the text. doors. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. windows. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls.9 On the Design Bar. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. and door frames. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.

type Legend Text. for Name. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. type Typical Symbol Legend. and click OK. click Text. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Arial. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 9 For Text Font. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Open Level Head . click Duplicate. and click OK.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK twice. click Symbol. click Edit/New. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 3mm. 10 For Text Size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click .

and double-click A101 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. click Typical Symbol Legend. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Legends. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. and for Leader.

Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Viewport : No Titlemark. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. click Modify.17 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Save the file. click Modify. double-click A102 . under Sheets. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and click to place it. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

For Host length. for Name. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. click Legend Component. 3 For Scale. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 900 mm. select 1 : 50. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Section. select Medium for Detail Level. For View. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. and press ENTER.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

10 Select the second wall. 12 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Modify. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Leader. for Family.9 On the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click Text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. click to add text without a leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. right-click Sheets (all). and drag it to the new sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. under Floor Plans. select Level 4. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and click New Sheet. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. 19 Type the following text.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. click Modify to end the command. 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. drag it onto the sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .25 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The open drawings are both visible. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 35 On the View Control Bar. select the Wall Type 2 component. click (Match Type). Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 34 Select the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .

you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Using the table.rvt. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. These changes can be due to owner requests. under Floor Plans. click 37 Save the file. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. double-click Level 4.36 Optionally. or changes in building material availability. In this exercise. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

Add a revision to the project 4 For Date.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In most instances. if the active revision is number 1. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. for Numbering. If you select Per Sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When Issued is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 5 For Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that Per Project is selected. When you use this option. 7 Under Show. type a date. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If Visible is not selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revision is locked and issued to the field. yet as concise as possible. In general. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. For example. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.

double-click Level 4. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 5 Select the divider. 9 Save the file. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the divider. under Floor Plans. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you make changes to the project floor plan. click (Move). Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. move the cursor up. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click Modify. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.

In the Snaps dialog. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. select Snaps Off.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved.

you load a revision tag into the project. select 6. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click OK. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 17 Save the file.

6 Click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 8 In the Tags dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 5 In the Tags dialog. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 10 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Because you chose to number by project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. click Training Files. click Tags.rfa. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.rvt. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. double-click Level 4. 4 On the Options Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you need to add one. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise. select Leader. You then issue a revision. 11 Click to place the tag.

double-click A107 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. under Sheets. and enter a date for the revision. click Add. 7 For Description. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 Click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.Unnamed. select Issued. You do this by issuing the revision. and click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. type Modify Paving Area. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and enter a date. you can no longer modify it. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. You can continue to add revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 8 Add another revision row. with the description Relocate Door. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you prevent further changes to the revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

17 Using the same method learned previously. 3 .Relocate Door to the revision cloud. double-click A107 .Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 12 In the drawing area. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 20 On the Project Browser. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 11 On the Drafting tab. Working with Revisions | 363 . 19 To add tags. in the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. apply Seq. select Revision Cloud. select Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans.Unnamed. select the revision cloud. for Revision. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 2 . select Seq. 13 Click Finish Sketch. click to add a revision clouds. double-click Level 4. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. under Sheets (all).Modify Paving Area. 10 In the Project Browser.

for Numbering. 26 In the drawing area. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You do this so that the revision can be changed. delete the first 3 characters. and rotation) to the revision schedule. Click Options. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. height. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. beginning with "D". you edit the titleblock family. clear Issued. 25 Click OK twice. for Sequence. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. For each revision. select Alphabetic.

all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. right-click Revision Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. for Build Schedule. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. for Appearance. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. select Bottom-up. and click Properties. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag it above the schedule area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Select Outline. under Other. 34 On the Design Bar.27 On the Options Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. Working with Revisions | 365 . and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Select Grid lines. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. click Yes. 33 Select the schedule header. and press DELETE. click Modify. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Clear Blank row before data. click Edit. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Yes. 28 In the alert dialog. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Edit Family. and select Wide Lines for the outline type.

select the revision schedule. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. enter Rev. 45 On the Appearance tab. open the titleblock family for editing. With a user-defined height. select 90° Counterclockwise. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. for Heading. and click Properties. and on the Options Bar. When the height property is variable. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. under Other. for Formatting. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Edit. right-click Revision Schedule. select User defined. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 46 Click OK twice. for Rotation on Sheet.. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area.

Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. text. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Yes. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and place it on a sheet.Title Sheet. double-click T . click Text. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. double-click T .Title Sheet. click Modify.rvt.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. click to add text without a leader.JPG. 5 On the Design Bar. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. for Leader.

Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 6 Select the text. click Modify. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. with the new text box still selected. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 11 Save the file. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .

and saved as Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.xls. 12 Save the file. 4 Under Printer.JPG. 5 Click OK. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. for File name. click File menu ➤ Print. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. This process may vary from system to system. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. for Name. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.mdi. select the document writer. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This step has been completed for you.Unit 18.JPG. 1 In the Project Browser. click Desktop. type Fixture Schedule.rvt. under Sheets. click Training Files. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Save.

To effectively document this project. The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 371 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

for Name. double-click Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and the model crop is the interior crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 6 In the drawing area. enter Level 2 . 3 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.Aviary.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. select the crop region.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region).

15 Select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2.Labs. and on the Zoom flyout. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. for Name. click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK.10 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

click Modify. click Matchline. and on the Zoom flyout. double-click Level 2. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 20 Click in the drawing area. 19 On the View Control Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.

and click Rename. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Level 2 . 33 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. under Floor Plans. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.Unnamed. expand Sheets. and drag it onto the sheet. 28 For Line Pattern. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . select 9. click OK to accept the default titleblock. for Name. right-click A101 . enter Level 2 Aviary. select Double Dash. and click OK.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab.Aviary. 27 Under Matchline.

40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. 39 On the Options Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 . for Target view. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Aviary is selected.35 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference.

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 44 On the Design Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar.Labs. for Target view.

double-click Level 2 . after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 48 Select the crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.46 In the Project Browser. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. under Floor Plans. click the far right control. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click (Show Crop Region). right-click. 49 If.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 52 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and click Apply Dependent Views. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. under Floor Plans. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. but are not placed on sheets. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 54 In the Project Browser. expand Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. select all views in the list.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3).

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view.57 On the Zoom flyout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. right-click South Elevation. and double-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 3 In the Project Browser. for Name. enter South Elevation . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area.Right. and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the view. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.Left. for Name. click (Hide Crop Region). 11 Select the crop region. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation . expand South Elevation. select the Crop Region. cropping the view to the lab building. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and click Rename. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK.The dependent view opens. 7 On the View Control Bar.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

The perspective view displays. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. click Camera.rvt. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and select the crop boundary.3 Zoom out. With the camera shown. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Depending on camera placement. as shown. in the Project Browser. and adjust the field of vision. double-click Site. If the camera is not shown in the view. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground.

8 In the Project Browser. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename. 10 Save the file. 7 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. enter Exterior .Day to open the view.6 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click Exterior . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.

and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. under 3D Views. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. double-click Exterior .rvt. You then duplicate the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .Day. c_Pool_House_in_progress. modify render settings.

The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox. 5 In the Rename dialog. enter Spring Equinox . 8 Under Quality. NOTE If a background image is required. and click Render.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for Sun. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. for Setting. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3pm. You adjust cloud settings as required. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. under Background. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Medium. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. You create a location and time for the rendering. 6 Click OK twice.Santa Monica. under Lighting. select Edit/New. In this case. and click Rename. select Sky: Cloudy. for New. 7 In the Rendering dialog.

10 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Show the rendering. After the image is rendered. Click Save. click Desktop.png). you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. For Files of type. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the model. click Export.9 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Flat Round : 60W . 16 With the Exterior . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. on the View Control Bar.Exterior . and select the last light. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and click OK. under Group Options.Night. for Scheme. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. add 30 :Sconce Light .120V. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. under Ungrouped Lights. click OK. 25 Using the same method. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Flat Round : 60W . verify that Pool Lights is selected. under Group Options. for Name. and click Artificial Lights.Night view open. under Lighting. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .120V to the Pool Lights group. click New. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . and click OK. dialog. click Dialog). press and hold SHIFT. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . right-click Exterior . and click OK.Day. under 3D Views. under Ungrouped Lights.Day view to Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . To select a sequential list. enter Pool Lights.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. and click Move to Group.Flat Round : 60W . click Render. for Name. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. select the first light. click New. select Exterior: Artificial only. enter Pool House Lights.

and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Adjust Exposure. you change the brightness of the exposure.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. click Show the model. under Image. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 30 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. for Exposure Value. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. In this example. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . and click OK. enter 4. 32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally. render the views. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.rvt. define the perspective view and rendering settings. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding RPC People In this exercise.

and on the Edit toolbar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. click Component. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the person’s line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. select RPC Female : YinYin. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the figure. Exact placement is not important. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 413 . ■ (Rotate). and place the component inside the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. you can enable this option. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 14 Save the file. 12 Click OK 3 times. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 13 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click Modify. click Edit/New. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Edit. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By default. click (Element Properties).

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera.

You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. under Extents.The perspective view displays. and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click South. in addition to the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box.

right-click. select the section box. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown.

18 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.15 Maximize the 3D view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 17 Save the file. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. doors that contain windows or glass. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and curtain walls.

5 Click Artificial Lights. for Scheme. you turn them off for this scene.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog.rvt. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You can specify a lower quality. 4 In the Rendering dialog. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. After these settings are established. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. select Draft. 7 Under Quality. under Lighting. enter Interior . under 3D Views. 2 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.Night. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Interior: Artificial only. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Setting. click Render. and click OK. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. clear Pool Lights. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. The preset schemes are read-only. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . the daylight portals can be turned on. select Region. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Curtain Walls. for Scheme. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . For more information on daylight portals. select Edit. for Daylight Portal Options.Santa Monica. (Show Rendering Dialog). click 14 For Setting. right-click Interior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. in order to turn on daylight portals. and click Render. In this case. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Interior: Sun only.Night. You create a view for the interior during the day. For sunlit interiors. for Sun.Day. click Copy To Custom. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. and click OK. 17 In the Rendering dialog.9 Close the Rendering dialog. By default they are turned off. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. you must create a custom setting. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Spring Equinox . Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.

In the next steps. enter 1. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Adjust Exposure. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. under Image. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. enter 10. 20 In the Rendering dialog. For Saturation. select the column on the right. and close the Rendering dialog. click Properties). and on the Options Bar.18 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Show the model. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Click OK.

30 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. 24 In the Materials dialog. select Printer. the render time increases significantly. For Width. select High. select Based on wood grain. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 29 In the Rendering dialog. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. You change the varnish setting. and click Render. enter 90. For Rotate. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. As size and DPI are increased. 23 With the column still selected. enter 5''. click the dimensions for Size. select the crop boundary. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Resolution. Click OK. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. add a bump map to create texture. clear Region. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . under Output Settings. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 32 In the Rendering dialog. For Amount. select Wood. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.6. select Unfinished.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Bump. 26 Click Update Preview. for Setting.

and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. but you can also define it in a 3D. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. The walkthrough path is a spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . independent of the Revit Architecture software. Usually. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. elevation. or section view. In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough.

and double-click 1st Floor. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Training Files. and click the tab in the context menu. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and change unit formats as desired. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. click Settings ➤ Project Units.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. proceeds through the dining room. click Walkthrough. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. expand Floor Plans. If you prefer to use metric values. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . on the Options Bar.

click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar.

11 Under Change. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). verify that Field of view is selected. select the crop boundary. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and click OK. If it is not. enter 16''. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. click the dimensions for Size. 12 On the View menu. for Frame. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. 14 Click . enter 1. and select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. enter 9''. for Width. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and for Height. click Edit Walkthrough. 17 Click .

2 On the Options Bar. under Extents. under Floor Plans. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. c_Townhouse. click (Element Properties). click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. press ESC. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. clear Far Clip Active. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. double-click 1st Floor. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.The walkthrough plays. proceed to the next exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK.

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. and drag it to the location shown. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position. for Controls. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 2 In the Length/Format dialog.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. When you export the walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. shading. on the Options Bar. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. under Walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. enter 15. under Output Length. hidden line. The walkthrough is recorded. for Model Graphics Style. select <Shading>. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and click OK. double-click Walkthrough 1. reducing the size of the image. or rendering. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 9 To play the walkthrough. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. for Compressor. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 3 Under Format. click Edit Walkthrough. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. specifying the number of frames. and click Save. shading with edges. for Frames/sec.rvt. 8 If you want to save this exercise. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. More specifically. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. 431 . Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. In this tutorial. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click Camera. click shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View In this exercise. 4 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). (SteeringWheels). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. as shown. A 3D view is created.rvt. and double-click 01 Entry. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Solar Study .

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 9 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Section. click Save As. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. as shown. expand 3D Views. and click OK. under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.5 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. enter Solar Study . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Create section 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View. 3 On the Design Bar. if necessary. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.

and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click 10 On the View toolbar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. expand Sections. and click Rename. 6 To view the section. double-click the section head. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. right-click Section 1. click . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.5 On the Design Bar. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click . and click OK. Typical plan views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. including the house. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. and click OK. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . right-click {3D}. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. you create a plan cutaway view. double-click 01 Entry. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. 17 To hide the section box. 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. In some cases. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. and click OK. click Callout. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 18 On the File menu. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. do not display many elements in 3D. then select Medium. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click Rename.14 In the Project Browser. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. then Fine.

and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click (SteeringWheels). so you can see into the building from the top. click Modify. 9 On the SteeringWheel. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the Roof. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.8 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 11 On the Design Bar.

Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. right-click {3D}. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 21 On the File menu. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . under 3D Views.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.

click . and click OK. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 9 In the Name dialog.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise.Boston. date range. or multi-day solar study. select Los Angeles. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . USA is selected. CA. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. for City. 3 Select Cast Shadows. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. USA. leave the slider at 50. click click OK. and click Duplicate. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. click . MA. For the Single-Day solar study. 10 Under Place. you specify the location. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. Click the Single-Day tab. Los Angeles. You can create a still. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 4 For Sun Position. you specify the location. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. date. expand 3D Views.Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. enter Summer Solstice. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. and time range. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. For this study. single-day. For the Multi-Day solar study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and time. expand Views (all). as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.

click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ For Time Interval. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Clear Ground Plane at Level. select June 22. and click Duplicate. on the Single-Day tab. for Sun Position. click . 14 In this case. click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. 16 In the Name dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 7 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. enter 20 and press ENTER. Under Frame. under Frame. 2008. for Date. click Save. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 2008. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK. For Time Range. select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. Los Angeles is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click OK. select December 22.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. enter Winter Solstice. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. enter 10 and press ENTER. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click . Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 19 On the File menu.

and click OK. double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. under Floor Plans. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. approximately as shown. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. The solar study animation plays. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. 13 On the View Control Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Text. click To display the next sequential frame. click To play the animation from start to finish. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .■ To display the next key frame. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. for Sun Position. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. on the Single-Day tab. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click OK. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. select Summer Solstice. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. .

4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser. click Lines.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 For Sun Position. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. On the Options Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. Click and enter Dining. approximately as shown. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.

as shown. 14 Click outside of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Summer Solstice. click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. select the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and enter 5 to 50. on the Single-Day tab. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. clear Section Boxes. if necessary.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. select Section Boxes. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . verify that the value is set to 15. Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ For Frames per second. and click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box. under Output Length. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 11 To display the section box. select Frame Range.

Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . of the animation separately. Click OK. For Files of Type. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and enter 5 to 10. For File Name. click . verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. for Model Graphics Style. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Model Graphics Style. click OK. Under Format. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that the value is set to 15. enter 450 in the first field (width). select AVI Files. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. and click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you open each image. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Compressor. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Dimensions. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. or frame. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size.Los Angeles. 3 For Sun Position. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Frames per second.■ ■ Under Format. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. under Output Length. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select Winter Solstice. select Frame Range. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Single-Day tab. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. To view the animation. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics.

you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 8 Click Save.■ For Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. depending on the Frame Range. TIFF. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. For File name. select PNG. In this example. For Files of Type. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . BMP. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. click the Desktop icon. enter 450 in the first field (width). The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. as shown: 9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Click OK.Los Angeles. under 3D Views. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. such as JPEG. or any single-frame format. or GIF.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click Save.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

Week Interval.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. MA. 5 Select the roof. and click OK. USA. and click Duplicate. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. specify 2:00 pm. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. clear Section Boxes. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Interval. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. For Time. for Sun Position. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and on the View Control Bar. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . for File name enter 2pm . 12 In the Name dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. and click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.Los Angeles .Boston. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Multi-Day tab. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. On the Annotation Categories tab. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. select One week.

you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Click the Desktop icon. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. such as East . click OK. for Compressor. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for File Name. 17 On the View Control Bar.South. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. In the Length/Format dialog. model views. double-click 01 Entry. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . When you mirror a project. under Floor Plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.West or North . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click Save. and annotations in non-drafting views. you mirror all model elements. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.

under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The project is mirrored along the East . View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the drawing area. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. select East . In this exercise. and click OK. 6 On the Standard toolbar. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West. Then. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. For additional information. 5 In the warning dialog. select the roof. click OK.West axis. right-click. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration.

click .3 On the View Control Bar. 12 Under Date and Time. on the Still tab. 8 For Sun Position. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. specify 11:00 AM for time. For example. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . click . and click OK. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. change the time back to 12:00 PM. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Still tab. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 5 For Sun Position. select Cast Shadows. click Apply. select Summer Solstice. 11 For Sun Position. Orienting to True North | 449 . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. and select Winter Solstice. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. and click OK. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). double-click 01 Entry. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. the view settings must be set for True North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. right click 01 Entry. select True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click . 15 For Sun Position. 14 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click the Still tab. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Orientation. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. When a project is started. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. This process establishes the view setting to True North. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.

click the Still tab. enter True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. select Project North. and click OK. click . right-click. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 33 For Sun Position. and click Element Properties. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. right-click 01 Entry. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 28 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. for Orientation. select True North. for Orientation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select True North Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and click Apply. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 27 In the Rename View dialog. right-click.

39 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For File Name. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that AVI Files is selected. Click Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click Summer Solstice. for Dimensions. click the Single-Day tab. Orienting to True North | 453 . Click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. enter 600 in the first field. Los Angeles. and click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. For Files of Type. click the Desktop icon. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. under Format. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for Compressor. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

(Show Rendering Dialog). and click Duplicate. select Winter Solstice.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Quality.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select 12/22. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. and 2:00 PM. and click OK. and click OK. under 3D Views. 3 On the View Control Bar. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. select Medium. In the Name dialog. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and exporting it as a JPEG image. capturing it. click Render. Rendered views do not have this limitation. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 2 In the Project Browser. for Date and Time. for Setting. select Interior: Sun only. For Sun. Under Lighting. under Settings. under 3D Views. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. 1 In the Project Browser. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In this exercise. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Since a rendered image is temporary. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. select Edit/New. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Scheme. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. For Files of type.6 In the Rendering dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Desktop. click Export. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. and click OK. enter living area_winter solstice. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Save to Project. and click Save. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .

456 .

You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. sections. Using the pre-built building model. a consultant. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. you explore the stylistic approach. In this series of exercises. 457 . elevations.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. you can choose between realism and stylistics. length. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. When organizing presentation graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Co-house. however. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. advanced model graphics. or the client. For the realistic approach. linework. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. an outside reviewer. and section boxes. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. type. and details. Other tools in the software. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. They include rendering.

458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. exit the menu. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. click in the drawing area. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. right-click 2nd Flr. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click Rename. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Cnst. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

rvt. dimensions.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 7 Under Visibility. and other annotations in this view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 Click the Model Categories tab. No annotations display in the view. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and clear DOWN Text. click the Annotation Categories tab. Down Arrow. and Up Arrow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. sections. and click Save. expand the Stairs category. navigate to the folder of your choice. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 11 In the Save As directory. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. UP Text. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 8 Click OK. elevations.

At that place. The higher the number. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 12 Click OK. 1:00 PM. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. ■ For Contrast.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Cast Shadows. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. NOTE For this step. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Sun and Shadow Settings. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 For Place. you can create.rvt. For Sun Position. select By Date. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. however. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. specify 35. click . click the Place tab. the darker the shadows. you can select any city. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. double-click it in the Project Browser. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. 3 On the View Control Bar. for Date and Time. on the Still tab. Within a project. If you select a different city. click . modify. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. select Boston. Cnst. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . specify 10/27. 6 Under Settings. and select 1st Flr. click OK. MA. 9 For City. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. Time and Place. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

for Sun Position. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Settings. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. . Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click OK. click (Shadows On).Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

click Sheet. click Add View. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . right-click the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 In the Views dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Arch Portrait. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. 6 On the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click to place it.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and notice the view title.

13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click . 12 In the Name dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. for Show Title. 9 On the Options Bar. select No. and click OK. To accomplish this. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. enter Presentation. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click OK. and click OK. and click Activate View. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . fill properties. When you finish drawing the chain. and select Chain. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click . 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 22 On the Design Bar. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. If necessary. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Edit/New. 20 On the Options Bar. click . and the boundary of the region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Filled Region. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click Region Properties. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. select Invisible lines. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 17 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant.

scroll down. under Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. enter Solid Black. click Finish Sketch. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Sheet Name. under Identity Data.24 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill. and click View Properties. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. click . click Duplicate. and click OK. enter Presentation.

rvt. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

and click OK. 9 Click OK. click in the drawing area. scroll up. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select By Date. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation South Elevation. specify 2:30 PM. right-click Copy of South. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. expand the Doors category. under Visibility.2 In the Project Browser. clear Visible. 3 In the Rename View dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. click in the Walls row. under Settings. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click Duplicate. click Override. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 35. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Name dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Time and Place. exit the menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 18 For Time. click OK. select Cast Shadows. and clear Elevation Swing. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 11 On the View Control Bar. 14 For Sun Position. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 For Contrast. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. on the Model Categories tab. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click (Shadows Off). 12 Under Shadow. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. under Visibility. under Elevations.

Presentation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).

The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.

Cnst. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the section shown below. for Scale. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.rvt. select 1: 100. double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Section.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. this view needs to be rotated 180°. as shown. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.Section 2 is added to the building model. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . select 1 : 100. 7 On the Options Bar. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. expand Sections (Callout 1). for Scale. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To accomplish this.

double-click Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Visible. click in the Walls row. expand the Doors category. under Sections (Callout 1). 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. under Pattern Overrides. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 2. 15 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1).Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Override. and click Rename. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. scroll up.

(Hide Crop Region). 20 Click OK. 22 On the View Control Bar. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. When you select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click The crop regions no longer display. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. In the steps that follow. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. select Cast Shadows. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. in the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Click Apply.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. For Contrast. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. specify the following: Under Shadow. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. ■ For Sun Position. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click . In addition. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. The shadows do not offer much contrast. and click OK. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). was added to this training file for training purposes. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click OK. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Silhouette Edges. For Altitude.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. Click OK. select Directly. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. for Silhouette style. Select Relative to View. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . specify 135°. and click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. specify 70°. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. For Azimuth. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

3 In the Views dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. and click to place the selected view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. click Add View. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.rvt.

and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click Modify.5 In the Type Selector. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. Using a clock as a reference. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. To rotate an object. and press Enter. click (Rotate). specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. select Viewport : Presentation. 9 On the Edit toolbar. The view title no longer displays. 6 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. double-click Section 2. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius.

12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°. double-click A105 . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Presentation.

and drag it up and to the left as shown. After applying the view template to a new section view. 15 On the Design Bar. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .

Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Sections (Callout 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Presentation. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click OK. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. enter Presentation Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. and click Rename. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The furniture. 12 In the Views dialog. select Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. under Graphics. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Activate View. 15 Right-click the viewport. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Names. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Deactivate View. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. for Rotation on Sheet. click Add View. under Sheets (all). Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. lighting fixtures.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . 18 Right-click the viewport. annotations. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . select 90° Counterclockwise.

Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. In this exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital. traditional analytiques contain a detail.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

double-click Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. After you add the callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . select the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.rvt. as shown. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1).

and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. under Sections (Callout 1). This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. as shown. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties. 7 Select the crop region. and click OK. under Extents. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. enter Presentation Callout.

Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. double-click A105 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Section: Presentation Callout.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. specify 22. Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . under Sheets (all). and click Activate View.Presentation. select Custom. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. For Scale Value 1.

and make adjustments as necessary. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow. double-click Presentation Callout. 23 On the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. When finished. activate the viewport. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and move it to the position shown below. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click Deactivate View.

click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region.Presentation. 28 In the Project Browser. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . and click OK 3 times. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. double-click A105 .25 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. for Fill Pattern. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. select Solid fill. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. on the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .

and sketch the rectangle shown below.31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 34 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region). click .

38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Hide Crop Region). you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.35 On the View Control Bar. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.

click the Scale control. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. and apply shadows to the views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. double-click Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows Off). 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1 : 200.

14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. For Altitude. select Silhouette Edges. double-click Isometric 2. select Directly. select Cast Shadows. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 8 In the Name dialog. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Select 1st Flr. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun Position. and click Rename. A section box displays around the building model. right-click Isometric 1. right-click Isometric. and click OK. Cnst. Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 135°.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Click OK. enter Isometric 2. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 45°. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. for Silhouette style. and click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. Select Relative to View. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For Azimuth. click . and click OK. specify 35. select Section Box. under Extents. 13 In the Project Browser. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Contrast. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click Rename. in the list.

You can use this to rotate the section box. as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. Grips display on each face of the section box.19 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.

Presentation. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 2. The section box no longer displays. enter Isometric 3. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. you can adjust the plane location. 21 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. make a copy of the view. 25 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 2. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Section Boxes. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click Rename. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. the stairs and railings may display. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. double-click Isometric 3. 24 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the section box. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 .Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 23 In the Rename View dialog. under Sheets (all). Next. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. double-click A105 . If desired. 29 To hide the section box.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select the poche filled region. 41 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. 36 On the Design Bar. 39 For Background. select Concrete. 40 Click OK twice. click Lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit. select Transparent. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. for Fill Patterns. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. This will make it easier to draw lines.

47 On the Design Bar. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.43 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. for Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Region Properties. 46 Click OK twice. and click Deactivate View. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. a cutaway perspective view.rvt. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. double-click 1st Flr. The view opens immediately. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . you add it to the presentation sheet. you create the final view for the analytique. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. then you specify the eye direction and range. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. Cnst. click Camera.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise.

500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. for Name. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).

You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . A section box now cuts through the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Grips display on each plane of the section box.

14 Select the crop region. 19 To hide the section box. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Change. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Sheets (all). 17 Under Model Crop Size. and click OK.Presentation. double-click A105 . click Size. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). select Scale (locked proportions). for Width. clear Section Boxes. 15 On the Options Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport : Presentation. enter 165 mm. 18 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. you must specify the actual size of the image. under 3D Views.

double-click it in the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . select the same font as the title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. enter Description. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. enter Title. under Text. select a font. and click OK. under Text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . specify a text size of 6 mm. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog.rvt. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click . click Edit/New. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Name dialog.

16 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description. click Modify.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. After you import the SketchUp model. and roofs. 507 . you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. that compose the building.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. curtain walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. Once the model has been imported. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. In this tutorial.

9 In the informational dialog. Click the Sketchup file. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. For Colors. buildings. click Training Files. 10 In the Name dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. you create a Revit Architecture project. For Files of type. select Preserve. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. Double-click the Common folder. For Layers. under Template file. click Create Mass. click Browse. select Auto-Detect. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. For Import units. enter SketchUp Model. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and not in the library. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. for File name.skp. select All. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. visible elements. enter Import SketchUp. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Save As dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. click the Massing tab. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise.rte. click OK. click OK. or select from a list. select SketchUp Files.

and roofs. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. ■ ■ For Positioning. For Place at level. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. click . select Level 1. click the Close button. select Manual . An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. curtain walls. 17 In the warning dialog. In a new project. Click Open. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click Finish Mass. Level 1 is the only choice. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.Center. such as walls. depending on the complexity of the project.

such as walls. 3 In the Type Selector. for Level. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 4 On the Options Bar. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .18 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. verify Level 2 is selected. and roofs. curtain walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. click Roof by Face. and on the View Control Bar. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. select the face so that it highlights in red. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. After you create the building from the mass faces.400mm displays. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. that compose the building. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. To see the new roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. on the View toolbar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click to display masses. click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. on the Options Bar.

■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

select Core Face: Exterior. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 16 On the View toolbar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. for Loc Line. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click roofs that you created. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.15 On the Design Bar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face.200mm displays. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 22 In the Type Selector.

28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique. click Create System. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar.

516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. select the other wall. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Curtain System. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Roof by Face. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.35 On the Design Bar. and select it. click Wall by Face. click Create Roof.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . double-click Level 1. specify a point to place the camera. and select the mass face shown below. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. click Camera. 42 On the View toolbar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Below the right corner of the view. click to view the building that you have created.

Click the frame to display its grips. to view only the walls. as shown. The perspective view created by the camera displays. roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 48 On the View toolbar.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. specify a point for the camera target. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. click your building in the view.

Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern. click . for Justification. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click Modify. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.

and move the roof edges as shown below. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click {3D}. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click 3D View 1. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click Door. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 63 In the Type Selector. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. 56 In the Project Browser. 59 On the View toolbar. 55 Right-click. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you create a curtain system using the wall command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. panel. To switch panel types. you select the grid. To change grids. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. For example. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. to resize the system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you need to select a panel. Like windows. and you can change these elements individually. you need to change the length of the wall.rvt. or you can use a specific curtain system command. grid lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. This affects the entire curtain system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Like walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. click Training Files.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. 525 . and mullions. and they are not windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and double-click Ground Floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

11 Select the curtain system. using curtain grids. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. top and base attachments. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and room bounding. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. top constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. For Top Offset.

23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . click Curtain Grid.a. 20 In the drawing area. click Modify. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. right-click Elevation 1 . double-click GROUND FLOOR.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 18 In the Project Browser.

FOURTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. THIRD FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to place another grid line. while pressing CTRL. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid. and click OK. 29 In the Select Levels dialog.26 While pressing CTRL. one larger than the other. Click to create a vertical grid. select SECOND FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FIFTH FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. click Modify. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel.

click Add or Remove Segments. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 531 .Next. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The two segments are removed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Instead of using the Door command. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.

click Curtain Grid. and lock them.38 Using the same method. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 43 Delete the dimensions. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.

on the new curtain system you added. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Now. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 54 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. This changes the graphics style of the Next.Next. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click view. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click Modify. 55 In the Project Browser. The panel changes to a double door. not as curtain panels. under Floor Plans. and click Wireframe. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. under Elevations. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 56 In the Project Browser. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. They are part of the curtain panel category. 52 On the Type Selector.rfa. double-click Entrance Elevation. 57 On the View Control Bar. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. These panels schedule as doors.

63 Click OK twice. Creating an Entrance | 535 . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panels display in blue. and the solid panels display in white. click .60 On the Type Selector. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.

you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 4 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. click Save As.rvt. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Grid Line Segment. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .68 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Entire Grid Line.

9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. You are going to change some mullion joins. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors.6 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . however. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. clickModify. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. there are a few that you do not want. 10 Delete the mullions below them.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. double-click Southeast Isometric. Finally. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. you can also right-click. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 17 Save the file.Two mullion join controls display. click Modify. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 14 Click the top mullion control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 13 Click the lower mullion join control.

you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. for Top Constraint. Curved Curtain System | 539 . click Wall. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. For Top Offset. Finally. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. Click OK. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 7 On the Options Bar. (Arc passing through three points). enter 1200. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you add a curtain system using the wall command. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.

14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. double-click East. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Divide the halves into quarters. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. eighths. you place grids on the system. under Elevations.

15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. to filter out all 19 Save the file. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. you change some panels in the system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .

4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and on the Options Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Chain. 3 In the Project Browser. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. enter 100. for Depth. under Elevations. select Glass. click Lines. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and click . click Model Lines. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. . 5 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.

All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and click Change Walls Orientation. select Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar.Pattern. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click. 19 In the Project Browser. All fourth floor panels are selected. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 23 Right-click. click Modify.Pattern. 21 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.14 On the Design Bar.rfa. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa family. 24 On the View toolbar. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . and return to the project file. (SteeringWheels).Pattern.

29 In the Type Selector. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All fifth floor panels are selected. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. right-click. 30 Save the file.Solid. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. select System Panel . All the panels change to the solid panel. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

and enter 50 mm for the radius. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mullion. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Training Files. double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For vertical mullions. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Mullion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select it. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click ■ ■ For Sides. Click again to specify the ending point. and click OK. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. for Profile Usage. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. enter 8. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Lines. under Elevations. Select Radius. .

click Modify. it can be added as a mullion type. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click (SteeringWheels). After the new profile is loaded.rfa. click Detail Component. clear Fine. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 31 Click . 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Mullion.detail. 20 Select the detail component.rfa. and return to the project file. and click OK. 28 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. click Visibility. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. double-click Southeast Isometric. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Visibility. click Modify.rfa family. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . double-click GROUND FLOOR. 38 On the Options Bar. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 33 Click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 43 Press DELETE. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. 40 On the Design Bar. right-click. 44 Save the file. and click OK. click Modify. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. select Circular Mullion for Family. for Profile. select All Empty Segments. You have placed more mullions than you want. so you remove the unwanted ones. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 36 Under Construction.32 In the Element Properties dialog.

you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and a ruled curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. a storefront system. In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and then apply those custom elements to the system. and you can click to select them all.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 4 On the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and press TAB. select Defines slope. TIP To chain select all the walls.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. enter 600. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. double-click Southeast Isometric.7 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. select Entire Grid Line. 16 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. click Finish Roof. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. 18 Save the file.

click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. and enter 2400. under Floor Plans.Storefront System In this exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Unconnected for Height. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 1 In the Project Browser.

double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. click Modify. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 12 Select the storefront wall. click Edit/New. 9 On the Design Bar. even if the wall height changes. 8 Click the temporary dimension. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. For this wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and click . Storefront System | 551 . which is specified in the type. This specifies an exact length for the wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. under 3D Views. enter 10200 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined.

you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. select All Empty Segments. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Angle. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 20 Save the file. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Justification. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. By setting the Angle value. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and Offset. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. center. double-click Southeast Isometric. 19 Select a curtain grid. or end. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 18 On the Options Bar. you find Number.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 16 Click OK. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. under 3D Views. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. enter 15. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. see the Revit Architecture help. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. click Mullion. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. and highlight the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

and click . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 10 Select the panel. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. click Curtain Grid.8 Select the highlighted line. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. Next. click Modify.

and then eighths. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. select System Panel : Solid.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally. 18 Save the file. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. right-click. quarters. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . embed a curtain system inside another wall. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.

556 .

In this tutorial. shed. click Training Files. 557 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. and low sloped roofs.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you learn how to add fascia. Before you can sketch the roof profile. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and open Metric\m_Roofs. gable.rvt. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and soffits to the roofs that you create. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn to create several different types of roofs. mansard. including hip. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. gutters. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In addition.

5 In the Go To View dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. expand Floor Plans. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 4 Click OK. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click Level 1. and click OK. select Name. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. centerline. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Ref Plane. expand Views (all). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.Next. 16 On the View toolbar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. sketch the roof profile. click Lines. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

21 In the Project Browser. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and select the second wall. expand Sections (Type 1). use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click Modify. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. press CTRL. expand Views (all). and double-click Section 1. 18 Select the edge of the roof. press TAB.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 26 On the View toolbar. click model.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

5 On the Options Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. verify that Defines slope is selected. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and click Yes. and double-click Garage Roof. and enter 600 for Overhang. sketch the roof footprint. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). click Pick Walls.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. Next. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.rvt.

select both slope definition lines. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click the model. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and click OK. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. click (Properties). By default. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. clear Defines slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 11 Press CTRL.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . click Pick Walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. clear Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. When you complete the roof. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. press TAB.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 8 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. sketch the chimney opening. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope.6 Click to select all the walls. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 15 On the Options bar.

3 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). select Defines slope. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 1 In the Project Browser.

trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 7 On the Options Bar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and click (Pick Lines). and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. clear Defines Slope. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. close the roof sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. select the left vertical slope definition line. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click (Trim/Extend). using the following illustration for guidance. 9 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines.

(Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 16 On the View toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Finish Roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 14 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. click (SteeringWheels). 17 On the View toolbar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and click OK. click Modify. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 18 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof).21 Click (SteeringWheels). Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Next. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 22 Using the same method that you used previously. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. join the two remaining walls to the roof.

Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. expand Floor Plans. click (Trim/Extend). 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. clear Defines Slope. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. m_Roofs. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. select the left vertical roof line. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Pick Walls. 9 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. enter 0 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next.

rvt. 16 Under Constraints. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a slope-defining line. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. expand 3D Views. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. expand Views (all). and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 19 On the View toolbar. Next. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and double-click 3D. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. click 20 On the View toolbar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. select Defines slope. m_Roofs.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. and press ENTER. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof.

and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 5 On the View menu. 11 On the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 3 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. add two new slope arrows. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. clear Defines Slope. Before you can add slope arrows. 9 On the Tools menu. click (Pick Lines). Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. expand Floor Plans. Next. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. To help locate the position of each split. expand Views (all). 14 On the Options Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Ref Plane. and enter 600 for Offset. and double-click Level 2. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 7 On the Options Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Next. click Modify. click Slope Arrow. you need to add two reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

select Slope for Specify. click Edit. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 3 On the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser.15 to add the second slope arrow. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. expand Views (all). and double-click Garage Roof. 20 Under Dimensions. the adjacent eave heights must align. and move the cursor to place the arrow. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select both slope arrows. and then click OK.rvt. m_Roofs. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. expand Floor Plans. 18 Press CTRL. (Properties). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 16 Repeat steps 13 . and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click 19 Under Constraints. When eave heights differ.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.

6 With the two gable end lines selected. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. click Align Eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. on the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . and click OK. (Properties). under Dimensions. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. When aligning eaves. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 5 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select a method to align the eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. Next.

(Properties). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Views (all). click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. and double-click North. under Constraints. expand Elevations. click Training Files. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 3 Select the roof and. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

6 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. and then select Defines slope. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click (Pick Lines). click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. under Dimensions. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and click OK. click Lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and select the remaining three lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 7 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

you add a roof to a building shell.rvt. click Save As. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578.17 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . After you add the roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click mansard roof.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 4 On the Options Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. select Steel Truss . for Type. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.EPDM.Because the walls are not continuous.Insulation on Metal Deck . and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click (Trim/Extend). as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 16 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. double-click the section head to open the section view. The roof has been created. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. click (Draw Split Lines). double-click Roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. under Floor Plans.

add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method. move the cursor horizontally to the left.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 18 Move the cursor down.

click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Next. (Add points). Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .The roof is now divided into 6 sections. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. In this exercise. You modify the points individually. click (Modify Sub-Elements). exact placement of the points is not important. 23 On the Options Bar.

25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. enter -2''. click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for the dimension. and press ENTER. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

and press ENTER. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click Modify. and select all of the roof edges. enter 4''. 31 Select the roof slab.27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. click (Properties). including the interior edges of the roof regions. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and on the Options Bar. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.

34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. After you create a roof. under Construction. Creating Fascia. and Soffits on page 586. 36 View the results in the section view. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure. The entire slab is sloped. click Save As. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. gutters. for the Thermal/Air Layer. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 35 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. By making the insulation layer variable. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 37 If you want to save your changes. and Soffits In this lesson. Creating Fascia. Gutters. Gutters. gutters. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. you can easily create its fascia. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and soffits in Revit Architecture. on the File menu. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Variable. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Edit. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and soffits. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Construction.rvt. enter Built-up Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. 8 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Condominium. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. 3 Press CTRL. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa. and click OK.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.

Creating Gutters on page 588. click (Properties). 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. c_Condominium. Creating Gutters In this exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.

select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Soffits on page 590. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. under Construction. click Edit/New. . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK three times. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK. click Duplicate. 10 Click to place the gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.

590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Pick Roofs. expand Views. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. and double-click Roof.Creating Soffits In this exercise. c_Condominium.

Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. click Join Geometry. 7 On the Tools menu. Creating Soffits | 591 . and then select the soffit to join them. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D.4 Select the roof. 8 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.

on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select Square meters. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. 593 . If you are using metric units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Click OK. select Millimeters. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. under Length. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. click Project Units. For Unit Suffix. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. your values will be different. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and open Common\c_Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. click Training Files. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. In the final exercise.rvt. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select mm. Finally. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Under Area.

View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. click OK. click the Area Schemes tab. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. select m2. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. or 0. click the Room Calculations tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 9 Click Cancel. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. select 2 decimal places. it is not necessary in this exercise. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. click Settings.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. These schemes define spatial relationships. and click Room and Area. For Unit Suffix. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. Click OK. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. expand Views (all). the system-computed height defaults to the level.

click Area. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. If you select No. rather than the area tag. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you must select one of the reference lines. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you must manually add these boundary lines. forming a closed loop. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. under Views (all). NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 12 When the informational dialog displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 13 In the Project Browser. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. To modify the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. When you select Yes in this dialog.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. common areas. Next. When you add area boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. and store area. click Area Plan. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. When you pick the walls.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. If you do not select this option. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Click OK. you can either draw them or pick them. click Area Boundary. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 21 On the Options Bar.

click ■ ■ . and click to select the area. Select Office area for Area Type. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 25 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.23 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click Area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.

■ Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Modify and select the area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Area. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 32 On the Options Bar.

Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type.■ Click OK. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 On the File menu. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. In the next exercise. In this exercise. and click Save. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.rvt. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.Notice that within the two store areas. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click to place the legend.

select Area Type and click Add. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category.3 When the dialog displays. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Areas (Rentable). 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 7 Under Available fields. and click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click the Fields tab. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

After you make building elements. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. 603 . or both. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You assign the default wall. After creating mass floors. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and perimeter information. roofs. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and floors. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. and roofs. you then need to update the building face. At any time. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. If you modify a massing face. floors. volume. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. building elements. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. In this tutorial. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floor.

and cutting geometry. under Views (all). click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 On the Design Bar. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. sweeps. and click Massing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Create Mass. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 16 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). enter 25000. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. click Lines. double-click Level 1. click 18 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . under Floor Plans. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. for Extrusion End. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. (Line). and click . click the value for Material. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for Offset. for Name. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. under Constraints. enter 1550 mm. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. (Pick Lines). select Mass (Opaque). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.

Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. select Pick a plane. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If necessary. for Extrusion Start. and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face. double-click West. for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click {3D} to see the results. enter 27500. for Extrusion End. highlight the larger form. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 23 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Mass (Transparent). 30 In the drawing area. enter 25000. click Extrusion Properties. under Views (all). 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 21 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. The second form is on top of the first form. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. and click .

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and click to select the line start point.31 Click to select the face. and on the Options Bar. (Pick Lines). click (Draw). The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click Lines. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. Next. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and clear Chain.

click the arrow next to the drawing options. 39 On the Design Bar. click Modify.TIP If you do not see this option. and delete the vertical construction line. click Edit Top. under Views (all). on the Options Bar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click (Move). (Line). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click East. click Lines and. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 45 In the Project Browser. 46 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar.

(Arc passing through three points). and click OK. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. 53 On the View toolbar. click 49 Create an arc as shown. for Material. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click Blend Properties. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.48 On the Options Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 52 On the Design Bar.

1 In the Project Browser. 7 Using the same technique. 2 In the drawing area. 9 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options bar. click (Line). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. as shown. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. m_Massing_Start. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted.rvt. and select Chain.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. double-click Level 1. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 10 On the Options Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. select the mass. under Floor Plans. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.

NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. When sketching each extrusion. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. In this exercise. enter 0. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. Using Swept Blends | 611 . for Extrusion End. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. snap the corners to the intersections. 14 Under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties. 15 Click OK. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 13 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

rvt. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Sketch 2D Path. under Floor Plans. ■ For the radius. double-click Level 1. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. and click Lines.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. m_Massing_Start. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass.

9 On the Options Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 11 On the Options Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click Profile 1. click Lines. click Finish Path. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Rectangle). 8 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. as shown. and click Edit. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 6 On the Design Bar.

(The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Profile 2. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Align). 15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile.13 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Using the same method.

18 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. click <By Category>. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. and click . select Mass (Transparent).

click Finish Mass. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Finally.24 On the Design Bar. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you create new family types from a mass family file. In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.

Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. under Other. In this exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 18000 mm. enter 46000mm. enter 9000 mm. 6 For Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. click New. 5 Click New. for Height. for Height. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. and click Apply. click Training Files. and for Name. for Height. enter 6000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Width. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 18000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and click Apply.rfa. enter 15000mm. click Family Types. for Depth. 8 For Width. and for Name. enter 12000 mm. and click Apply. enter 68000 mm. for Depth. enter 11000 mm.rfa. 7 Click New.

You also load other existing mass families and place them. Arc Dome. click Training Files. on the View toolbar. 3 On the View Control Bar. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Floor Plans. 1 If not already selected. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Views (all). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 8 In the Type Selector.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. as shown. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass. click Training Files. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rvt.rfa. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. and Triangle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 2 In the Project Browser. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 6 Open the Box-Training.rfa family files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Site.

Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click Place Mass. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click (Element Properties). select the triangle. 17 Press CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown.10 On the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. 25 In the drawing area. select Rotate after placement. for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Opaque). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. as shown. 11 Select the box. and click OK twice. click Modify. click Place Mass. select the 3 boxes. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 20 In the Type Selector.

26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). 33 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 29 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass.

rvt file. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). NOTE When you join geometry. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. (Join Geometry). In this exercise. In the next exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.

4 Select the triangle. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. click (Mirror). double-click Site.

TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click (Draw). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . enter SM. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. for Axis. click (Default 3D View). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.8 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. (Join Geometry). and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. as shown.

624 | Chapter 17 Massing . (If Design Options is already selected. and select the triangle mass element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. do not clear the check mark. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.In this exercise.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you joined mass elements together. click Modify. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.rvt. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 1 On the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.

13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Place Mass. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. under Views (all). for the Material parameter. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 90. double-click Site. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. for Angle. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Sloped (primary). select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass. clear Curved. and click (Element Properties). 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Transparent). Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults.

While pressing CTRL. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK. 28 In the Project Browser. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click (Element Properties). under Elevations. select Curved. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Add to Design Option Set). for the Material parameter. 20 In the drawing area. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. select the three arc domes. and watch the status bar. double-click North.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 23 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. TIP To find the correct shapes. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. clear Sloped. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

33 In the Design Options dialog. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 31 Click the value for Design Option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.rvt. under Option. click Make Primary. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you placed mass elements into Design Options. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you can make it the primary option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 35 On the File menu. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click (Design Options).29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise. 34 Close the warning that displays. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click OK. select Curved and. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. and click Close.

3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. and for Loc Line. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create walls. under Views (all). 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Faces). click Wall by Face. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rvt. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar.

under Views (all). under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 5. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. double-click Level 3.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.18 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. If desired. double-click Level 9. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

rvt. 4 Click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. When you select levels. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. double-click {3D}. and exterior surface area. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. click Mass Floors. and click OK. perimeter. Curtain Systems. volume. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. under Views (all).In this exercise. and Walls. clear Curtain Panels. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select all levels. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Modify. click Mass Floors. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. select Levels 1-4. 13 On the Design Bar.

click Mass Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 15 Press CTRL. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and click OK.14 On the Options Bar.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Floor Volume. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.In this exercise. and click OK. 4 Using the same method. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Category. Floor Perimeter. and click Add. under Available fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. The Floor Area.rvt. press and hold SHIFT. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and select Level. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Mass Floor.

enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. and click OK. select Mass: Family and Type. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. for Usage. for Sort by. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

click Edit. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. under Scheduled fields (in order). click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 14 Select Level. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. for Fields. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. After you assign usage. 13 With Usage selected. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Remove.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Edit. for Filter. and in the field below. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. 22 In the Project Browser. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 27 Click OK twice. select Usage. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. select Usage. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. under Other. and plan views. for Filter. select Calculate totals. and click OK. select Level. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. 16 On the Formatting tab. 18 On the Filter tab. and click Rename. for Filter by. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . enter Hotel. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. and select Grand totals. for Then by. elevation. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. for Field formatting.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Floor Area. in the field under Filter by. under Other. and click OK.

under Views (all). double-click {3D}. by level. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created mass floor schedules. the floor area.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Roof by Face.In this exercise. floor perimeter. The mass floor schedules list. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof.400mm.4 In the Type Selector. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.

In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar.8 Using the method you just learned. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. and Walls. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. Curtain Systems. select Sloped Glazing. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. in the Type Selector. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Create Roof. and click OK. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.

under Views (all).rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 5 Press CTRL. double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. click Curtain System by Face.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 11 Using the same method. click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).9 On the Options Bar.

In this exercise. you change the size of an existing mass family. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Model Categories tab. double-click Site. and click (Element Properties). 7 On the Options Bar. and Walls. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and then click OK. 2 On the View menu. for Width. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Curtain Systems. under Floor Plans. Roofs. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Next. enter 30000. clear Exclude Design Options. Floors. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . clear Curtain Panels.

10 Open the 3D view to see the result. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . In the next steps. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). under Floor Plans.

15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . Also. 17 Select the roof as shown. click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. click (Default 3D View). 14 On the Options Bar. you want to select the smaller one. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here.TIP To select the curtain wall.

18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake. and click Remake.

double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

3 In the Project Browser. 9 Select Mass. 4 Rename the view 3D . right-click {3D}.Massing only. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. click All to select all categories. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired. You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof.

652 .

or with those working on a different project. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. 653 . You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. By grouping objects. place. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and typical office layouts. In this tutorial. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you add the new model group to a previously created group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. After you create a model group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. When you make changes to a nested group. You mirror one instance of the group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. In another exercise. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you also simplify the modification process. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can also nest groups within other groups. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating. hotel rooms. the host group is also updated automatically. you not only simplify their placement. In this exercise. Modifying. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. For example. and modify repetitive units. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen.

click Training Files. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Views (all). and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter ZR. and double-click First Floor.rvt. expand Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . and click OK.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . expand Model. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. click Modify.

clear Copy. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it. press TAB to highlight the wall.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group | 661 . When you finish editing. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click Save. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As.rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group.

). 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE To display an excluded element. press TAB.). and click to select the wall. select the element.).). 7 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. click Modify. and click member to group instance. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.

clear Tag on Placement. 14 In the Type Selector. Modifying a Group | 663 . 12 On the Design Bar. click Door.127mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. move the cursor to the left. 15 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 10 In the Type Selector.

click Modify. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 23 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Edit Group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.17 On the Design Bar. In edit group mode. 21 On the Options Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.

and click OK. click 28 For Base Offset. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Modify. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 29 On the group editor toolbar. for Unconnected Height. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. and on the Options Bar. enter 2134. Nesting Groups | 665 . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 1000.25 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. (Element Properties). 26 Select the opening. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. under Constraints.

4 On the group editor toolbar. click (Add to Group). select the Typical Kitchen group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. under Floor Plans. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group.

8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 667 . select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

such as door and window tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. such as text. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you add door tags to a group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and filled regions. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.

and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click to draw a rectangular region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Group). 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. as shown. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click OK. and on the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to add an arc leader. 12 Enter Tile. 16 In the drawing area. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Text. click Modify. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and select the text note and the filled region. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.

18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. Because the detail group contains variables. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 20 In the Project Browser. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. under Groups. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. as shown. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. clear Leader. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.manner that a drawing component can be added.rvt. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. click Modify. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.

and click OK. click (Group). double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK.7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Filter dialog. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. under Floor Plans. for Attached Detail Group Name. click (Filter Selection). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . click Check None. select Door Tags. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Modify.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Place Detail. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. therefore. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and click OK. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. for Create new. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. verify that Project is selected. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. browse to the Desktop. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 .rvt. select 2 Bedroom Unit. under Groups\Model. 12 On the Design Bar.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Open. A warning dialog displays. In this case. click Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. and click Create Instance. 3 For File name. verify that Same as group name is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. click OK. and click Save Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and expand Model. expand Groups. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Modify. accept the default template file. and click OK. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.

You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. and click OK. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. expand Revit Links. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Remove Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog.rvt. click Bind. 17 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Use Existing. click Link. select the linked Revit model. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and on the Options Bar. When a group is converted to a link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click OK. and the link is removed. 24 In the message dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the final exercises. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. islands. you add a building pad to the site.Site 19 In this tutorial. and then modify the data. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 677 . You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. You add property lines manually. Using Site Tools In this lesson.

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. This project file was created using the default metric template. and click Site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Point.rvt. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Training Files. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. and open Metric\m_First_Project.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Toposurface. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and double-click Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the first method. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). In the second part of this exercise. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 4 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Use the following illustration as a reference.

12 On the Settings menu. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. under Additional Contours. and 18000mm absolute elevations. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 12000mm. under Increment. click Finish Surface. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. and click OK. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Site Settings.8 On the Options Bar. 15000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. enter 1500mm.

Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. (SteeringWheels). click to delete it. 14 On the View toolbar. Before importing the contour data. modify the level names and elevations. and double-click South. 19 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click to view it at various angles. and press ENTER. 15 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). enter 1000mm. click the elevation value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser. on the Standard toolbar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Modify.

double-click Site. 28 On the Design Bar. For Colors. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Verify that Current view only is not selected. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Yes. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Layers. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Until it is exploded. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Pin Position. select Specify. and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. rename the level Base Site Elevation. under Views (all). click Training Files. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. it is considered an import symbol. 29 Select the imported topography. select Preserve. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 30 On the Edit menu. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Click Open.21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 23 Click the Level 1 text. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.

35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the View menu. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and then click OK. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Toposurface. select it. when the edges highlight. 36 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click the Annotation Categories tab. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. When you select the import symbol. clear Elevations. 34 Under Visibility.

Adding Property Lines In this exercise.rvt. Using the second method. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site-in progress.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). Using the first method. and click Save. you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 On the Design Bar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 40 On the View toolbar. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines on page 684. click (Default 3D View). this project file is required in its current state.

Adding Property Lines | 685 . do so before continuing.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 4 On the Design Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select Create property lines by sketching.rvt. Select and delete the right vertical line. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Property Line. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. click Lines. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. On the Design Bar. Click Modify. click Lines.

click OK. add an arc line on the right. and click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Property Line. select Edit Table. A warning dialog is displayed. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 8 On the Options Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 9 In the warning dialog. click OK. when they highlight. to delete them. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select the lines. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click to place the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 16 Click OK. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 19 In the Tags dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the Imported Categories tab. clear Leader. Before adding property line segment tags. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. In the final step. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 Under Visibility.dwg and click OK. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 22 In the Tags dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click Tag ➤ By Category. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. you created two sets of property lines. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 On the View menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The tags display more prominently in this view. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. and click OK. In the next exercise. and click Drafting. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography.20 Click Load. 27 On the Options Bar. click to place it. click Training Files. 30 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.rfa.

7 Click OK. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. select Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. In the Object Styles dialog. 2 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles. and click OK. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Site Settings. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Line Color. click New. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 Under Additional Contours. select a shade of Brown. for Subcategory. Site-in progress. select Single Value. Under Line Pattern. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Range Type. enter 1000.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Under Subcategory. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.rvt. select Working Contour. select Dash dot. under Contour Line Display. enter the name Working Contour.0mm.

and islands. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. parking areas. parking areas. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you create subregions in order to define roads. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.11 Click OK. Working Contour. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. The object style subcategory. you create topographic subregions to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. The next exercise requires a new training file. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. In the next exercise.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . and open Metric\m_Site. click Training Files. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. try to replicate the location and proportion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Subregion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Lines.

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.Tarmacadam for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. click Properties. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step.NOTE In the Metric training file. enter Parking for Name. select Site . and click OK.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.9 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans.Tarmacadam. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 14 On the Options Bar. As you create new subregions. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. double-click Site. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule. and double-click Topography Schedule. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. expand Schedules/Quantities.

17 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. In this training project. under Schedules/Quantities.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines. double-click Site. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Lines. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion. 22 On the Design Bar. Within each subregion. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the project area has increased. 20 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch.

select Site . Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 26 In the Materials dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . click the value for Material. under Materials and Finishes. enter Island .Grass for Name. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration.23 In the upper-right parking area. click Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Schedules/Quantities.Grass for Name. 29 On the View Control Bar.

add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Design Bar. Name the subregion Walkway. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Name each region Island Grass. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. 32 In the Project Browser.Grass. click Subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. click Lines. and apply the material Site . You must sketch each region separately. double-click Site. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .walkway. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated.31 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar.

you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. there is still only one toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. under Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.

rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. When you use the grading tool. Site tutorial-in progress.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. and click Save. this project file is required in its current state.

The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Using Phasing on page 761. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. under Phasing. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select and Edit. see the tutorial. 8 Select the topographic surface. select Existing for Phase Created.3 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). click Modify. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. A warning dialog is displayed. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 15 On the Options Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.13 Press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Point. click Finish Surface. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar.

Adding a Building Pad | 703 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. When you add a building pad. and delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.20 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. (SteeringWheels). you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. specify Existing for Phase. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Therefore. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. specify New Construction for Phase. click View Properties. click to view it at various angles. only the original toposurface displays. under Phasing. and click OK. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 24 On the View menu. under Phasing. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. this project file is required in its current state. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Select the toposurface. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. you can delete it. click View Properties. Only the graded topography displays. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

the Pick Walls command is active. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. double-click Site. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE By default. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines.rvt. click Pad.

8 On the View toolbar. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 7 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Notice the new building pad. click (Default 3D View). 9 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components on page 706. this project file is required in its current state. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

and select the parking space. click Modify.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. click Parking Component.90 deg. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.Adding Site Components In this exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View).NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 .

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. choose any tree type. under Floor Plans. Notice the new parking spaces. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.9 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels). 708 | Chapter 19 Site .

In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components | 709 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 14 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (Default 3D View).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered.

Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. click Apply. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 5 On the View menu. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. and click Apply. and click OK.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. this project file is required in its current state. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . click Hidden Line.rvt. under Floor Plans. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

The exact position of the dimensions is not important. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. as shown: 10 Using the same method. outside of the site. 8 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Click again to the left to position the leader. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. In the following exercise. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. to position the shoulder of the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.

click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar. and select the 3 spot dimensions.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. click Modify. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . you create a parking schedule. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

enter Size. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 12 In the Site plan. If necessary. enter Space. 10 In the Project Browser. select Parking for Category. double-click Site. and click OK. and click Add. 8 Under Fields. under Views (all). click Close Hidden Windows. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 9 On the Window menu. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Type. and click Add. under Space. 4 Under Available fields.rvt. 11 On the Window menu. select Mark. number the first three spaces consecutively. 6 Click the Formatting tab. and under Heading. 7 Under Fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The parking schedule is displayed. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and under Heading. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields. under Floor Plans. click Tile. Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Type. select Mark.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. finish numbering the remaining spaces.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

Using Worksharing. you specify an active workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. A workset is a collection of building elements. The first time you activate worksets within a project. To make a workset editable. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. use Element Borrowing. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you must first enable Worksharing. and so on. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. called Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. stairs. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. however. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. select the desired workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. In this tutorial. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. they cannot make changes to it. When you are working on a shared project. Elements specific to a view. After the project is shared. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. and click Editable. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. such as walls. floors. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. doors. such as annotations and dimensions. go to the Worksets dialog. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time.

Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. not including the Project Standards. After learning the fundamentals. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Instead. and View worksets. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Experience has shown that. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In the next exercise. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. such as a tenant interior. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. In most projects. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. When setting up Worksharing. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. for a typical project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. In a multi-story structure. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Shared Levels and Grids.dialog. You should have at least one workset for each person.

you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Regardless of the default setting. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. When you create a new workset. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. designers work in teams. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. if a workset named Interior was created. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. When creating the new worksets. As new members create worksets for their own use. On this tab. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. For example. each team member has control over a portion of the design.Team member roles Typically. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing.

720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. When you save to the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can select which workset is active. After saving to the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. However. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When finished or at regular intervals. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. On the Options Bar. you make that workset editable by you. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. within the local file. your changes are saved. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you have the option to choose which worksets to open.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Generally. As you work. Therefore. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the file is saved as the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you should then save to your local file. proceeds as usual. When you save locally (to your local file). Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. This makes them available to other team members. This is called “Selective Open. however.

you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. reload the latest changes from the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. To do this. In this conceptual exercise. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and make that workset editable. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. using VPN. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. In this situation. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. When working remotely. make any required worksets editable. save to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In the next exercise. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you should check out the Materials workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. Alternatively. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . and then save the local file. In this instance. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. for instance. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file.

and notice all are editable by you. Your username displays as the present owner. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 3 In the Worksets dialog. and open Common\c_Worksets." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. click Training Files. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you enable worksharing.rvt. The Worksets dialog displays. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. under Show. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.

and Views. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 14 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. under Identity Data. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Because the interior walls appear in many views. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. ■ 5 Under Show. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". select any of the exterior walls of the building model. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. click . and click OK. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. When you initially activate Worksharing. click New. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. clear Visible by default in all views. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. clear Families. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. You do. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Rather than create a new workset for these elements.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. In this training file. 12 Click Rename. click OK. currently named Workset1. Project Standards. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . it is better to make them visible by default. For example. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. another is assigned the interior layout. imagine four users including yourself. 16 In the drawing area. however. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. select Workset1. expand Views (all). you can rename the default workset. For training purposes. 11 In the Worksets dialog. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and double-click Level 1. 17 On the Options Bar. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 9 Click New. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Therefore. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. In this simple training project. Only User-Created worksets should display. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 13 In the Rename dialog. type the name Exterior Shell. 8 Click OK. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell.

724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 20 Select one of the interior walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 Select all of the interior elements. click . under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 24 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and walls. 21 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Worksets tab. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. stairs. and click OK. 29 Click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. including the interior doors. 26 On the View menu.19 Click OK. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.

This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. and click OK. under Views (all). select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. double-click Level 2. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 38 In the Save As dialog. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . In this exercise. 41 In the Worksets dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. If any interior elements remain. click Worksets. click Non Editable. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Save As. click Close. 44 On the File menu. Now that you have created the central file. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 32 Select Interior Layout. 30 On the View menu. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 43 Click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. 39 Click Save. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. make sure you remember the location of this central file. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click the Worksets tab. 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area.

name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. Next. 4 Click Open. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. check out worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 7 In the Save As dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select all the User-Created worksets. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and click Save. 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. select Interior Layout. expand Views (all). click Worksets. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 15 In the Project Browser. select the central file. click Save As. 13 On the Window menu. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. make modifications to the building model. Before working on the model. you create your local file.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. In this case. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. In addition. and double-click Level 1. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Yes for Editable. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Open. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 12 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Name. please do so before continuing.

20 Under Constraints. 23 On the File menu. click Worksets. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. however. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. In the Worksets dialog. notice the Editable Only option. click Modify. under Identity Data. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Verify that it is cleared.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. If this is selected. click . Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. you can still edit this wall. In this case. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 22 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 24 Click OK. If it was owned by another user. and click OK. the Edited by value is now assigned to you.

click Wall.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 31 On the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. 26 Delete the door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 34 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Whenever you save. add two door openings into the rooms you created. two users access the central file through a network connection. please do so before continuing. In this exercise. click Save to Central. and reload the latest changes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. a tooltip. In addition. you should perform regular saves. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. At the end of a work session. each user must check out worksets. By default. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. When working in your local file. leave this file open in its current state. checked out worksets. In this particular case. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. it is recommended. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. and save locally immediately afterward. you created your local file. save to central. You modified the building model. you should relinquish all worksets. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Borrowed Elements is selected. which matches the information in the Status Bar. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. For training purposes. displays the workset as well as the element type. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. make elements editable. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Throughout the process. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset.

two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and select Specify. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. instructions are staggered. return to the Settings dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Options. In addition. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. under Username. 11 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. 12 In the Save As dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This is a system setting. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. click Save As. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 7 In the Open dialog. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 Click Open. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. click Options. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. enter User 2. For training purposes. and click OK. click Worksets. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select the central file. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In the following section of this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. and click OK. This file is for your use only. You now have a local copy of the project. and proceed to Creating a local copy. skip the following section. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu.rvt. click Open. 15 On the File menu. specifically sequenced. consider that person to be User 1. User 2: Create a local file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2.

click Save to Central. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Floor Plans. open it now. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. modify the building model. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 29 Click OK. select the lower exterior wall. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 23 Click OK. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. If it is not open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all).You are now the owner of that workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 27 On the File menu. 24 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 17 Click OK. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 19 On the File menu. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. it becomes the active workset. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open.

and click OK. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. However. under Views (all). Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 46 In the Project Browser. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Worksets. under Floor Plans.” 35 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. right-click Level 1. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. When you save to central. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 33 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Click Yes. click Reload Latest. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 43 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 39 Click OK. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Rename. you should create a furniture plan view. click Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. 41 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. 37 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Floor Plans.

This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 48 In the Type Selector. 49 On the Design Bar. are placed under Project Standards. click Component.” 55 Click OK. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 61 Click OK 2 times. Therefore. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. such as Wall Types.200mm. click Save to Central. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 53 On the File menu. click Worksets. click the Worksets tab. 65 Click OK. 66 On the File menu. rather than Families. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 62 On the File menu. select Project Standards. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE System families. 63 In the Worksets dialog.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. choose any desk. click Reload Latest. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Rename. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. enter Exterior Wall . select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Edit/New. and click OK. and click inside any room. under Show. and click Element Properties. 60 In the Rename dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Modify. click Save to Central. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 50 On the View menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. and click OK.

you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. This exercise requires two users and. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. finished the previous workset exercises. throughout this training. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and these problems are rectified. and click OK. select Save to Central. Each user must have network access to the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. click Save As. and still have your local files open. modified the building model. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Each user checked out worksets. and published their changes back to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog. select the following. User 1: Reload latest. and save 69 On the File menu. In the final exercise of this tutorial. As each of you work. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. select Reload Latest. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. leave this file open in its current state. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In subsequent steps. click Training Files. you save the training file as a central file. click Options. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you need to set up your central and local files. Checking out worksets. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 70 On the File menu. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. There are specific instructions for each user.

This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select the central file. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and click OK. On the Settings menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. 5 Click Save. Next. 13 In the Open dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Save As. The central file should still be open. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click Save. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. 15 Click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. click Save As. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. select Make this a Central File after save. In addition. return to the Settings dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and click OK. 12 On the File menu. Set the Username to User 2. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . and click Save. 17 On the File menu. and select Specify. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 In the Save As dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You have created a local file which is for your use only.

23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. click the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Afterwards. and select Yes for Editable. and click Open. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. At this point. under Floor Plans. 30 On the left exterior wall. click Worksets. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 29 On the Options Bar. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and then click OK. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and then click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. After you submit the request. select them. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select the Interior Layout workset. 27 Under Active Workset. select Interior Layout. click Worksets. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Exterior Shell. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. double-click Level 1. select the second window from the top. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 22 In the Worksets dialog.

■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. select the following. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 36 Click Close. and click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 35 Click Grant. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and the other user granted it. and close 39 On the File menu. select the request submitted by User 2. and notice the window is in the new location.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. In this multi-user exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . In this case. click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. click Check Now. A message informs you that your request has been granted. to Local. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select Save to Central.

738 .

you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Using design options. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In addition. In this particular case. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this tutorial. After you and the client agree on the final design. For example. The client has asked you to create various options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. At any time in the design process.

therefore. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. the only available command is to create a new option set. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Close. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. With the second option. 3 Select Option 1 (primary).rvt. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each with multiple design options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. each is constructed for interchangeability. TIP In this exercise. click Edit Selected. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you can edit it.In the first exercise in this lesson. you design each of the structural options. In the second exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. under Option Set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click New. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and delete the unwanted options from the project. After you create a design option. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you set up multiple design option sets. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Training Files. make your final design decision. In the final exercise of this lesson.

14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. In the following illustration. click Column. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. select: ■ ■ ■ . or add a dimension string between the columns. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. TIP To center the middle column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. In this case. 5 On the View menu. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns.4 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and the third column centered between the two. click Modify. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. expand Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 11 On the Edit toolbar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. By selecting Multiple. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 9 On the Design Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click 12 On the Options Bar. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Views (all). and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. add three columns.

Because of the size of the columns. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. they are difficult to see in this view. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. using the same technique.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm. In it. click Modify. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom in on the upper right column. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click TOP OF CORE. you add the beams that span the columns. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. click Beam. Next. Use the following illustration as a guide.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The first click specifies the beam start point.

click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.25 On the Edit toolbar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns. 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

click Rename. under Option Set. 46 Under Option. enter Roofing for New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 40 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. name the option Louvers. and click OK. There should now be two roofing design options. under Option. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). 41 Under Option Set. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 32 In the Design Options dialog. 45 Under Roofing. under Option. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. enter Beam for New. and click OK. under Option Set. click Rename. and click OK. click Rename. click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. enter Structure for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 37 Select Option 2 and. 43 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. not a new option set. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. click Rename. click New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click New.

select Beam. under Structure. click Rename. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 48 Under Option. 52 Click Close. double-click ROOF TERRACE. it will resemble the following illustration. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Edit Selected. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 51 Under Edit. This allows you to more easily manage the project.47 Under Roofing. under Floor Plans. select Option 2. Under Now Editing. you create the second design option. When finished.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 58 On the Tools menu. 56 In the Type Selector. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select M_Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Refer to the following illustration. The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Component.

62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. The second click represents the move end point.60 After aligning the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 70 On the File menu. 68 In the Design Options dialog. name the file. 67 On the Tools menu. click . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Finish Editing.rvt. and click Save. 69 Click Close. m_Urban_House-in progress. you need this file in its current state. click Save As. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. which is visible by default. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 66 On the View toolbar.

After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The second roofing system. under Roofing. open it now. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. a Louver system. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 10 Referring to the following illustration. delete them after the rafter is in place. select Louvers (primary). The dimensions shown are for training purposes. click Edit Selected. each with multiple design options to pick from. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise.In this exercise. 2 On the Tools menu.rvt. Under Now Editing. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 6 In the Project Browser. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. the other for beams. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. expand Floor Plans. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Component. In the next exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. With the second option. The first option. you set up multiple design option sets. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. If you need to add dimensions. do so now. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. you design each of the roofing options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 8 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Design Options dialog. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 5 Click Close. expand Views (all). 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.

12 Select the rafter you added previously. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. under Other.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Constrain. enter 11750 mm for Length. 15 On the Edit menu. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter 5 for Number. Select 2nd for Move To. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 16 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Modify. click Array. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

enter 990. when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

click Component. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click the Edit menu. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click . and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Array. and select the louver you just placed. Select 2nd for Move To. 27 For the array starting point. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Enter 34 for Number. 20 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 22 On the Design Bar. under Other. enter 5475 mm for Length. 25 With the louver still selected.

29 On the View toolbar. enter 300. and press Enter. and. when the listening dimension displays. click . 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.28 Move the cursor vertically downward.

and double-click West. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and then click Close. 34 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.The louver roof system is complete. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. under Edit. click . select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. under Roofing. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Finish Editing. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click Edit Selected. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. In this case. 30 On the Tools menu. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 33 Under Editing. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Therefore. click Lines. and click OK. Click OK. expand Elevations. select Sunscreen. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.

756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first two points define the ends of the line. The arcs should connect. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Under Constraints. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. click Properties. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools menu. then the center arc. You will fix this in a later step. click Trim/Extend. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click . enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. then you can modify it through the dimension. 49 On the View toolbar. the top of the next column on the right. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 45 Click OK. and the third point defines the arc. Select the right arc. 48 On the Design Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Select the top of the left column. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click Finish Sketch.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. Under Constraints. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns.

Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. under Views (all). and click OK. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. under Edit. Managing Design Options In this exercise. you need this file in its current state. a Louver system. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and then click Close. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. After exploring the combinations. and delete the discarded design options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 2 In the Project Browser. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. do so now. secondary. tertiary. click Save. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. The first option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In this exercise. you select a design. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. 50 On the Tools menu. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view.The louver roof system is complete. and click Duplicate. click Finish Editing. enter Primary Option. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 52 On the File menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you designed each of the roofing options. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. Sunscreen. and last options. make it part of the building model. Managing Design Options | 757 .

10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. 7 On the View menu. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option.5 Right-click each of the copies. 11 On the View menu. under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 9 Click OK.

21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 19 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click Visibility/Graphics. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. At this point. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. double-click Last Option.14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 15 On the View menu. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. In your design options. click Visibility/Graphics. In this case. Managing Design Options | 759 .

asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 31 In the alert dialog. 24 Under Option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the beam option becomes part of the model. 25 Select Structure. 26 Under Option Set. 30 Under Option Set. click Yes. This was the client choice for structural. click Save. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Accept Primary. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. In this exercise. An alert is displayed. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Close. After exploring the combinations. click Yes. double-click Primary Option. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 27 In the alert dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. you selected a design. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. select Make Primary. and deleted the discarded design options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. under Structure. the current primaries are no longer options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. since you no longer need them. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. made it part of the building model. select Beam. The set is deleted. 29 Select Roofing. click Delete. Because the client has selected the design option. 35 On the File menu.22 On the Tools menu.

In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 22 In any project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. complete with schedules. 761 . you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. For the client. In the second exercise. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing walls and doors. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. demolish existing construction. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. This changes room definition and total building model area.

expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. click (Element Properties). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. During the demolition and renovation process. 7 Click Cancel. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 4 Click Cancel. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. define the units. go to the Settings menu. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you create a new project. and open Common\c_Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 6 On the Options Bar. If you wish to do so. expand Floor Plans. In the Element Properties dialog. This means that all building model elements. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. under Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. regardless of phase. under Phasing. are visible in this view. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and double-click Level 1. click Project Units. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . As you add new elements to the building model.Phasing Your Model In this exercise.rvt. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Modify. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. and click OK. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. you work in a simple model that requires renovation.

you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. including the door tags.Existing. click . Because this is a renovation project. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). Because this is a phase-specific view. enter Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Rename. and click OK. under Floor Plans.Existing. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. 20 In the Rename dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click OK. After you release the mouse button. all of the building model elements. right-click Level 1 . 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Click No.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. After you create the views. are highlighted in red. under Phasing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click Rename. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Door Tags. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Existing. TIP If this were a multi-story building. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 763 .Demo. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.Existing. enter Level 1 . 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click Level 1. 11 In the Filter dialog. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename dialog.

View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. In this case. to which all the building model elements belong. 29 For Composite Plan. 21 In the Project Browser. click the Phase Filters tab.Existing. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. You may need to zoom in to see this. On a logical time line. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. double-click Level 1 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Phase status is time-dependent. and click OK. double-click Level 1 . select Overridden. select Existing. There are five default phase filters. Existing. you modify these settings. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. however.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Demolished. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 26 In the Phasing dialog. new construction occurs after existing construction. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. for Phase. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. Later in this exercise. Because of this time relationship. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 Under Filter Name. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing. Next. 27 Click New.Demo. and Temporary. under New. enter Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.

Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 42 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Demolished row. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. or you can use the demolish tool. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. As you click each wall. Phasing Your Model | 765 . double-click Level 1 . 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. When you demolish the host. There are two ways to demolish an element. select the line style. double-click Level 1 .31 Under Phase Status. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. you begin demolition. its display changes to a red dashed line. Next. select red. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select Demolished. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase.Existing. 35 Click OK twice. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 34 In the Color dialog. click (Demolish). under Cut ➤ Lines. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.Demo. select a lighter blue. click the value for Color. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 36 Using the same method. select the interior walls one at a time. click OK. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

click Wall. under Phasing. click Door.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 50 In the Type Selector. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter.Demo. The demolished walls no longer display. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". select Basic Wall: Interior . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. add a long horizontal wall. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 49 On the Design Bar. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. and click OK. 53 Open Level 1 .Existing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). under Phasing. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 47 In the Type Selector. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 51 Add a door leading into each room. and click OK. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

New. click (Default 3D View). All elements are displayed in this view. 60 On the View toolbar. new is shown in blue. 59 Open Level 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Demo. which are displayed as red. regardless of phase. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 57 In the Project Browser. 62 If necessary. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. because the phase filter is set to Show All. Phasing Your Model | 767 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.New. right-click Level 1 . The renovated building model plan is displayed. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 61 On the View Control Bar.

you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases.New. define the units. demolition. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. go to the Settings menu. In the next exercise. therefore. click Project Units. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. In this view. you can see the new walls added to the building model. expand Views (all).rvt. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click Training Files.Demo. 63 Close the file. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. In this exercise. 2 Open Level 1 . the rooms change in both definition and size. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. If you wish to save this file. and new construction. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. 3 Open Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Existing. and click OK. Notice that this view is the original building model. you do not need to change the project units to metric. sizes. you can do so at this time. If you wish to do so. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. As the renovation process continues. You can also see that the room quantities. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and double-click Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In this view. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. All room boundaries are phase-specific. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .

and maximize the view.Demo. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.Existing. 5 Click OK. 13 Open Level 1 . 9 On the Design Bar.New. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Use the following illustration as a guide. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click in each room as you move to the right. click Room Tag. In the Phasing dialog. click Room. 6 Open Level 1 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.

770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .New Construction. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Tile.Existing. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . 19 On the Window menu. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. The two schedule views tile. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. click Close Hidden Windows. expand Schedules/Quantities. In addition. In this exercise. 20 Close the file. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In this case. 18 Open Room Schedule . The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. performance. In this tutorial. You position the building models on the site plan. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In these situations. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. 771 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.

You link two building models to the project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. One building model is a condominium. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. You position the building models on the site.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. modify their visibility. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

click Open. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 On the File menu. All three files now reside. with write permission. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. c_Townhouse. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.■ Auto . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Save As. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. 8 Clear Read-only. and open Common\c_Site. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Otherwise. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. RELATED See the lesson. Select c_Site. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. ■ ■ Manual .Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. however.rvt. c_Condo_Complex. right-click. click Open. 5 On the File menu. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. this system is not exposed to the user.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. this option will place the link at a predefined location. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Click Open. select the three files. and click OK. Auto . 4 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Close. and click Properties. and save the file there. This option is grayed out. Manual . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. click Training Files. you can do so.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Open. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the blue detail lines. expand Floor Plans. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning. expand Views (all). select Auto .NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you can go to the Settings menu.Origin to Origin. click Project Units. 11 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. If you wish to do so. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and make your changes. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.

The second click specifies the move endpoint. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The Move command requires two clicks.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. After you select it. click (Move). The first click specifies the move start point. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 17 For the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.rvt displays in the Type Selector.

18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. select Auto . Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. 21 Click Open. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.After you specify the location to move to. and select c_Townhouse.

and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. 23 On the Edit toolbar. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. when the vertical line displays. click to specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . To rotate an object. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. you first specify the rotation start point. In this case.

click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

The Copy command works much like the Move command. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

for Name.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. click Rotate. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. enter Townhouse A. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 37 On the View toolbar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. and click OK. 32 On the Edit menu. click (Default 3D View). under Identity data. use the Move command to make any adjustments. click . 34 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. 2 On the SteeringWheels. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. click (SteeringWheels). you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.38 On the File menu. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. After linking the files. When you originally linked the files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. In the next exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. do so before continuing. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click and hold Orbit. click Save. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. they were placed too low within the site topography.

the status bar displays the name of the linked file. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. you first select the plane you want to align to. and click OK. and click to select the line. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. click (Align). and double-click South. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. In the steps that follow. and then select the plane that you want to align. When using the Align command. when it highlights. expand Elevations. and click to select it. under Views (all). you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.rvt. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. In this case. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. To do this. Click the Revit Links tab. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click Save. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 15 On the File menu. 12 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). This would over-constrain the model. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. double-click North. 14 On the SteeringWheels. (SteeringWheels). 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click and hold Orbit. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. click 13 On the View toolbar.

rvt. click the Revit Links tab. display settings. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. click Custom. 9 Under Visibility. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. When you link a file. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. click By Host View. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click OK. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. expand c_Townhouse. or Custom. 4 Under Visibility. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 8 For Annotation Categories. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.rvt. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. double-click South. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. you can independently control the visibility settings. click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. do so before continuing. As you can see. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. you need this project file open and in this view.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. detail level. In this exercise. If the Basics page is set to Custom. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. In the next exercise. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. select <Custom>. under Elevations. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 2 On the View menu. By linked view. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. no detail level changes are required.rvt. 16 Under Visibility. click the Revit Links tab.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . You can click the value for Detail Level. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. 22 Click the Model Categories tab.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. medium. 23 In the Model categories list. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. and then set the detail level to coarse. By default. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. 24 Click OK. expand c_Townhouse. or fine. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. With linked files.rvt. click the Revit Links tab. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 20 For c_Townhouse. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. and click OK. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click By Host View. In this case. By selecting custom under Model Categories. select <Custom>. on the Basics tab. Using the Custom option. under Display Settings. select Custom. 14 On the View menu. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.

All other components are grayed out. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. In this case. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. all new.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. In most cases. this is preferable. under Visibility. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. existing. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In the next exercise. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. and phase filter of a specific link. However. on a sloped site for instance. 28 Select By linked view for View range. select c_Townhouse. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By default.rvt. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click OK. 26 Under Display Settings. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. there are situations. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. With the Show All filter applied. 31 On the File menu. you manage the linked files. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save. demolished. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you need this project file open and in this view. phase. In this case. In this exercise. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. 25 On the Revit Links tab. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. click Custom for the Townhouse link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 29 Click OK.

In a shared coordinate environment. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. the link is maintained. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. click the Revit tab.rvt. The default path type is Relative. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. 3 Under Path Type. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. select c_Condo_Complex. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File. 7 Click OK. Locations Not Saved. click Manage Links. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 5 Click Unload. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . click Yes. In general. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. You learn more about this in the next lesson. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Notice the Loaded. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 6 At the confirmation prompt. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.

If you choose not to open that workset. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Specify. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. the link is not loaded. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. When you initially place the link. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. right-click c_Condo_Complex. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. However.rvt. 9 On the File menu. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. and click Reload. expand Revit Links. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. click Save As. In general. To do this. In these cases. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file.

When used in conjunction with model linking. The host file consists primarily of site components. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In the next lesson. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you are establishing a shared origin point. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. and the resulting project files. When you share coordinates between projects. name the file Site_Project. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. In essence. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In this exercise. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. If you have not completed the previous lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. and save it as an RVT file. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. do so before continuing. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project).10 In the Save As dialog. leave the project file open in its current view.

As indicated in the Status Bar. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case. If you have not completed the lesson. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. When you are working in the host project. Select Site_Project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. click Open. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. and the resulting project files. 3 In the drawing area.rvt and click Open. If you have closed the project.coordinates are used. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. click the Condo Complex. open it before continuing. Linking Building Models on page 772. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. do so before continuing. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.

Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click to select it. On the Status Bar. and Lot C. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. even though both models originate from one linked file. it is placed at a specific location. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. These three locations can be named Lot A. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. do so before continuing. when the edges highlight. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. this location is not saved outside of the host project. select Location 1. Lot B. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercise. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. You also relocate the shared origin of the project.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. but can have multiple additional locations. However. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 .

and click OK.2 On the Options Bar. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click Rename. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. This is a one-time operation. Record the current position as a location. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click OK. select Move instance to. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Reconcile. 4 Under Value. click . 9 In the Select Location dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. When constraining a link to a location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Instance Parameters. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 7 In the Rename dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. enter Lot A for New. In the Choose Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. . click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Change. 12 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. and click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. When you release the mouse button. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. click Duplicate. This is a two-click process. Save locations 21 On the File menu. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. When you relocate a project. 23 Click Save Locations. By relocating a project. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. ignore the warning. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. When you create a location. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. To explicitly save a location. Because Lot A is currently in use. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. click OK. click Manage Links. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. select the second option. 26 Click OK.Notice the OK button is not active. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 30 On the Tools menu. the active location position is moved. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 16 Click Change. click the Revit tab. 19 In the Select Location dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . and click OK. and the left townhouse resides at that location. enter Lot B for Name. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. The second click specifies the move endpoint. select Save. and then select the townhouse project. you cannot redefine its location. Record current position as. make sure Lot B is selected. or cancel the action. Notice the OK button is still not active. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. a warning displays. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. select Save. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Close. click Save. 33 On the Edit menu. NOTE In the following exercise. 34 On the File menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. you work in one of the linked projects. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. In this exercise.

if other models were linked into the same host. In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. Select c_Condo_Complex. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. For Positioning. When opening the linked file. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared.rvt file. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . it is placed automatically within the host project. The current active location is Lot A. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Open. Click Open. Also. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. Because this building model only has one named location. select Auto .rvt file.By Shared Coordinates. If you have not completed the exercises. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. double-click 1st Floor. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. In addition. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.

Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click View Properties. and click OK. and click Make Current. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. you need this project file open and in this view. you can select Lot C if necessary. under Graphics. If you have not completed the exercises. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the host file. click Manage Place and Locations. 3 In the Name dialog. 7 Click OK. and click OK. enter Lot C. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. select True North for Orientation. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. click Manage Place and Locations. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Select Lot B. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. do so before continuing. you manage the shared locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. you create a new location. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click OK. In this exercise. click Duplicate. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In the next exercise. orient a view to true north. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu.

click Open. do so before continuing. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. On the Options Bar.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt and click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Close. Select Site_Project. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. If you have not completed the exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. You can save the file if you wish. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area.

click the Fields tab. and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. select Count. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. select Doors.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

In this exercise. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. click Save. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK. 14 On the File menu. under Other. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . right-click Door Schedule. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 Select Grand totals. click Close. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and then click OK twice. select Family and Type for Sort by. You have completed this tutorial. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. and click Properties. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 13 On the File menu. clear Itemize every instance.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and set it as your default template. and click OK. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you create an office template. 10 In the Options dialog. 4 Under Colors. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click OK. In the first lesson. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. In the second lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click the Graphics tab. 11 Under Colors. selection default options. notification preferences. click the Graphics tab.rte. These settings control the graphics. 3 In the Options dialog. under Template file. journal cleanup options. 6 In the New Project dialog. click the value for Selection color. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Finally. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 803 . 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. which is independent of the project settings. select Invert background color. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Training Files. you modify the system environment. and your username when using worksets. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. they are not saved to project files or template files.

NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. For Selection color. 13 Click the General tab. click Modify. For Tooltip assistance. click Modify. and click OK. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 In the Options dialog. and select the wall. clear Invert background color. click Training Files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 14 Under Notifications. click No.12 In the Color dialog. select One hour. select None. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 When prompted to save changes. When an error occurs. the elements causing the error display using this color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Settings. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. However. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Wall.rvt. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. select yellow. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. 15 Click OK.

Under Journal File Cleanup. do not save the changes. Under Username. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. However. such as in a large. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Default path for family template files. 10 In the Places dialog. 4 Click Cancel. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. select Normal. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. you specify default file locations. notice the list of library names. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 2 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Places. select the folder to save your files to by default.27 Click the General tab. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. including your default project template. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. If prompted. 3 Under Default template file. and click Open. family template files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. For Tooltip assistance. Your login name displays by default. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click the File Locations tab. 5 Under Default path for user files. you can start a new project with that template. and family libraries. centralized. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. click Browse. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. Specifying File Locations on page 805. 7 In the Options dialog. TIP To view a template. 8 Click Cancel. These files are used in the software support process. and click Browse to select a template. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.

An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. templates. 11 In the Places dialog. and change the name to My Library. or families. and you can create new libraries. click (Add Value). and click Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Load. In the following illustration. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. saving. under Libraries. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select it as the library path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and click the icon side of the field. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit Architecture file. and Import dialogs. When you are opening. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.library names and path. Save.

Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click the My Library icon. view the current path. If you want to relocate this path. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Select My Library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Save. 9 In the text editor. 28 Click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. and click OK twice. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 24 Click 25 Click OK. such as bump maps. This path is determined during installation. 3 Under Settings. 15 Under Library Name. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. and decal image files. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. specify the new location here. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 5 In the text editor. 22 Click Places. 19 Click Cancel. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. custom color files. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Edit. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 21 Click the File Locations tab. click My Library. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. and Import dialogs. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

under Template file. click OK. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. 21 In the text editor. 19 Under Settings. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 20 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Modify. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. If prompted.11 In the Options dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 In the Options dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. click Text. delete sheetmtl-CU. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. do not save the changes. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 18 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. you modify snap increments. 14 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click File menu ➤ Save.rte. 22 In the text editor. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click default template. you modify snap settings. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Restore Defaults. You can turn snap settings on and off. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Training Files.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Chain. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . click OK. If it does not. 8 In the Snaps dialog. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching. 7 Under Object Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. TIP To zoom while sketching. click Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint.. such as ZO to zoom out. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and move the cursor to the right. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom out until it does so. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and enter 500 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter SM. If you do not have a wheel button. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.6 Under Dimension Snaps.

This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and the wall edges. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. 18 Enter SM. and click Wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the midpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. If you move the cursor along the wall.. This is the increment that you added previously. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and delete the value 500 . Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Do not set the wall end point. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 21 Move the cursor downward. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. and do not save the file.

click Training Files. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. You create and modify materials. and object styles. Finally. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. lines. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . In the steps that follow. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Using these options. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. When you apply a material to an element. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. save the project file with a unique name. annotations. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. fill patterns. you render a region to observe the changes. and open Metric\m_Settings.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials.rvt.

you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The properties describe the color. this material provides a starting point for the new material. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. In the Materials dialog. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project.Fieldstone. and select Masonry . When you change properties of a render appearance. These details will display in rendered images. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 6 Click Replace. scale. select Stone. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 9 Click Apply. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK. Masonry . the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone.Fieldstone. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 Click (Duplicate). expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 2 Scroll down the materials list. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. enter Masonry . In the steps that follow. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the next exercise. for Class. and texture of the material. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. 10 Click the Graphics tab. However.Stone. and click OK.Fieldstone material. When a model element is loaded into a project. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. read-only library for render appearances.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.

select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.Brick. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 25 On the View toolbar. . and click OK. 15 Click Duplicate. 16 Enter the new wall name. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select the rear exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. 18 For Finish 1. click Model Graphics Style. select Masonry . 24 In the Type Selector.Fieldstone. and click OK. 23 While pressing CTRL. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 17 For Structure. click in the Material field. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. click This is the material that you created. 26 On the View Control Bar.Fieldstone. click (Default 3D View). Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click Edit. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click Edit/New. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 In the Materials dialog.

27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Rendering dialog. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click Rendering Dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. The rendering process begins. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. click Render. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. under Quality. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. select Region. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. In the following exercise. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. select the render region (a red rectangle). When finished. for Setting. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 29 In the 3D view. and click Rendering. right-click the Design Bar. select Low or Medium.

you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. select Custom. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and clear Region.rvt. choose Model. expand Elevations. 5 Click New. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. click Show the model. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. click Show the model. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. and double-click West. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. such as steel.rvt. in the Rendering dialog. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Import. 7 Under Custom. Then click Render again.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Zoom into the model. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. m_Settings-in progress. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 In the Rendering dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area.

and click OK. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 Under Custom. click Training Files. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. click Modify. click 15 For Structure. and for Import scale. 22 Click OK three times. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click Edit. 11 Click OK.pat. select fldstn. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows.56. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . enter . The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). enter Fieldstone. for Finish 1. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.Fieldstone material.Fieldstone. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 21 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material field. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click Edit/New. click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Model. under Pattern Type. 10 For Name. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 13 On the Options Bar. click to select a fill pattern.

use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region).rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. For example. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 2 On the keyboard. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. click (Default 3D View). Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. TIP If the pattern does not display. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. and double-click 3 Windows.25 On the View toolbar. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. m_Settings-in progress. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. there are often multiple window types within a project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

under Materials and Finishes. 11 On the Options Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. . for Trim Exterior Material. 8 In the Materials dialog. click (Element Properties). 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Select the arched window. click By Category (located under the materials list). 14 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. for Trim Exterior Material. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. click By Category. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. and click 15 Click OK twice. 5 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 9 Click OK twice.

and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . expand Windows. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. or keywords include the word red. and click OK.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. type red. enter Trim . 28 Under Shading. select Paint. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. for Class. click in the Material column. for Name. and select Trim. select Use Render Appearance for Shading.red paint. descriptions. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. (Duplicate). 23 Click Replace. click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. When you render a 3D view. 18 On the Model Objects tab. and click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. . 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. click OK. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. select Trim. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 19 For Trim. 25 In the search field.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. select Roofs. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. select Roof Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Name. click New. Now that you have created a line pattern. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. m_Settings-in progress. under Category.31 On the View toolbar.rvt. 10 For Line Color. 11 For Line Pattern. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Red.rvt. enter Roof Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. m_Settings-in progress. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. (Default 3D view). is open with the 3D view active. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.

The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line color displays in this view. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views.12 Click OK. double-click to Building. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . but not the line pattern.

sections. select Solid. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. click Override. select Black. select Roofs. select Roof Line. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 19 For Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. under Category. for Visibility. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 20 Click OK. select 5. For Color. double-click 03 Roof. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. Plans. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Roofs. 15 In the Project Browser. For Pattern. elevations. select Blue. 18 For Line Color. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

select Red. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. enter Zoning Setback. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. For Line Color. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. double-click Site. select Zoning Setback. 34 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. specify the following: ■ For Plane. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. (Line). click New. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 29 For Name. select 2. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select Double dash. For Line Pattern. under Modify Subcategories. Click Click (Draw).25 Click OK twice. click Lines. 31 Click OK. This places the line above the topography. Notice the site topography and the property lines. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 33 In the Type Selector.

NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 40 In the Project Browser. 44 On the View toolbar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Lines. and clear Property Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and then clear Property Lines. (Default 3D View). as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. click (Default 3D View). NOTE If Site is not selected. double-click 02 Entry Level. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Expand Site. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. select it. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 39 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. 43 Click OK. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

rvt. 9 In the Type Selector. You have created a new dimension style. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Modify. click one wall. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. select Linear . Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click Dimension. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 4 Enter the name Linear . Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. For Units.Imperial and click OK. and then click outside the second wall.Imperial. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. under Floor Plans. and place a dimension on the floor plan. m_Settings-in progress.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. for Units Format. click the default value. m_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click another wall. (Undo). 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. double-click 02 Entry Level. 7 Click OK twice. select Feet and fractional inches. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 5 Under Text. To place a dimension. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 10 On the Standard toolbar.

This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 18 In the Tags dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. clear Leader.Number as the assigned tag.Number. 27 On the west wall.Number. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 21 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click OK. under Category. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click Cancel. 19 Click Load. select the 3 window tags. click the bottom window. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click M_Window Tag . 28 On the Design Bar. Leave M_Window Tag . 24 While pressing CTRL. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .rfa. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.14 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. notice that the label displays 1i. click Tag All Not Tagged. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. click Training Files. scroll down to Windows. Then press Delete. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project.Number is now the assigned tag. In the preview image. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties). 22 Under Loaded Tags.

Temporary Dimensions. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view.Number. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. In the second section. click the default value. Unless overridden. In the first section.Temporary Dimensions. m_Settings-in progress. select Openings.rvt. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Specifying Units of Measurement. click the default value. you modify the temporary dimension settings. verify that Create is clear. select Faces. 9 Under Doors and Windows. dimensions use these project settings. for Area. and Detail Level Options on page 827. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Unless overridden. the other displays the instance value.Temporary Dimensions. In the final section. dimension values display using this setting. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. M_Window Tag . select 0 decimal places. for Rounding. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 8 Under Walls. 31 On the Design Bar. for Length. you specify the project units of measurements. you modify the detail level assignments. 3 In the Format dialog. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. select To the nearest 100.Under Category. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. notice Window Tags appears twice. 32 On the View toolbar. Specifying Units of Measurement. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 2 In the Project Units dialog. and Detail Level Options | 827 . click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. select meters squared. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. 6 Click OK. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. For Unit symbol. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. (Default 3D View).

Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. expand Floor Plans. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 12 Click OK. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In this project. In this exercise. click Training Files. In this table. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. and expand 3D Views. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.rvt. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not select a view scale to move it. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.

and click OK. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. expand each view type. select Discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that views are grouped by phase. select Type/Discipline. and click Apply. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all). and notice that each is grouped by discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser.

13 Select Sheet Prefix. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. click the Folders tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 16 Click the Views tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click New. expand each sheet set.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. expand Complete. expand 3D Views. Proceed to the next lesson. When you create a new template based on an existing template. and view names. Creating an Office Template | 831 . You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Whenever you create a new project or template. and expand both Architectural and Structural. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Browse. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and open Metric\Templates. navigate to your preferred directory. View Type (Family and Type). click Training Files. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 21 In the Project Browser. enter a unique file name. and click OK. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. under Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. 2 Under Template file. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. For example. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. you create an office template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. levels. If you want to save this file. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. In that case. and Discipline. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. the same rules apply. When you create new projects. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Creating an Office Template on page 831. when you create a new project. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. dimensions styles. In the lesson that follows. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In this lesson. You can choose from several templates. you select the starting point for your office template.rte template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and click Open. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. weights. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 6 Click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. close them. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. and double-click North. If you have additional projects open. In this exercise. 12 Under Template File. When you create the material. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. If you want to use a template other than the default. 15 Under Create new. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules.5 In the New Project dialog. drag a zoom region around the level heads. in the drawing area. 9 In the Project Browser. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. for Create new. click Browse. 14 Click Open. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For example. you modify the project settings for your new template. select Project template. you can select it now. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. select Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 13 Select the default template. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template.

12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and imported objects. and change render appearance properties. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. and scroll through the list of categories. transparency. the changes are saved as part of the project template. or refer to the online help. For more information. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form.During this exercise. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. You do this by defining the render appearance. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. create new subcategories. create and modify them as needed. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 2 Scroll down the materials list. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . see a preview of the rendered material. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. see the previous lesson. texture. annotation objects. In the Object Styles dialog. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. line colors. When you create or modify a material. Modifying System Settings on page 803. TIP For more information about creating new materials. and move model patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. line patterns. If you change render appearance properties. 4 Click Replace. including color. For more details on modifying these settings. or modify existing patterns. and similar attributes. Observe the materials that are already defined. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. You can align. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. or refer to the online help. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. rotate. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. 13 If necessary. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. you can set line weights. specific modifications are not dictated. 9 Click OK when finished. and materials for model objects. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab.

15 Modify categories. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. name the style. and dimensions. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. To see the details of a particular style. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. select it. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. line color. 29 Click OK. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. such as section lines and dimension lines. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. and create new subcategories as needed. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and click Edit. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 19 If necessary. 18 For existing line categories. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. modify the line weight. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 34 Click OK. tags. 20 Click OK. You can add and delete view scales. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. create new line subcategories. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 32 To modify a line pattern. or line pattern as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. select it from this list. and specify the properties.

45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 50 To load new annotation tags. click Duplicate. 46 Click OK. 53 For Length.40 Click OK. angular. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 60 Under Walls. and choose a decimal symbol. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 61 Under Doors and Windows. To see the details of a particular style. 58 Click OK. click Format. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and click OK. and Angle settings. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. when you add a door with the tag option selected. For example. 62 Click OK. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Volume. TIP In the drawing area. name the style. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Linear. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 57 Specify the Slope option. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 55 Click OK. and specify the properties. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. select it from this list. In the Tags dialog. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. click Load. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.

you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. click the Views tab. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. or edit existing organization types. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. or edit existing organization types. In a typical project. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 72 If necessary. 64 Review the table. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. See Setting up If necessary. Using the arrows between the columns. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Use the table below as a checklist. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. rename. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. You can find additional information in Help. Although these settings can be saved within a template. In such a case. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. When you create a new view. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Each command is available on the Settings menu. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. click the arrows between columns. For example. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 69 If necessary. 68 Delete. create new browser organization types. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Links to associated tutorials are provided. However. or Fine. 73 Click OK. Medium. rename. 65 Click OK. and move view scales as needed. 71 Delete. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. To move the view scales. The detail level is based on view scale. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.

furniture. and electrical fixtures. title blocks. phase filters. you can set up the phases. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. there are some important thoughts to consider. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you can set the default contour line interval.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can load any family or group into a template. click Door. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. and the poche depth. the section cut material. If this selection is satisfactory. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. modify. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. For example. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. However. you could load detail components. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. or add to this selection. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. you can move onto the next component type. In addition. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. do so before starting this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you do both. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. or use the Project Browser. if you load every available window type. For example. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you may want to delete. 2 In the Type Selector. Depending on the intended use of this template. or electrical fixtures. Although this is possible. Although the options are endless. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. If necessary. In the steps that follow.

or load a new door type. Make modifications. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. create. In the Element Properties dialog. create. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .3 To modify. or modify a door. Select it. and click OK. click Load. Enter a name. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click Open. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Edit/New. Click Duplicate. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. expand Families. In the Element Properties dialog. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Modify type properties. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that each family category is listed. click Edit/New. click Bar.

load. Discipline. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. View Range. click Load. To do so. Detail Level. right-click the component. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. 11 On the Options Bar. This title block is currently part of the template. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block.) 10 Expand the title block. To load a title block. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. click 12 Click Preview. and select the title block type. In addition. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 13 Click OK. and click Delete. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In this exercise. you created new projects using different templates. create. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . you create the views required for your template. (Element Properties). Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. In addition.

10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. click Apply. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the view is not linked to the template in any way. double-click South. and click OK. 4 If necessary. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. under Elevations. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. open the view from the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. click Apply. After applying the template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. select Architectural Plan. 6 Click OK. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. double-click Level 2. In addition. In this exercise. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. you can apply a view template to any view. Every time a new plan view is created. 11 Click Apply. 3 Specify each value according to your needs.settings of categories and subcategories. and apply the appropriate template. At any time. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you will first modify view templates. and then click OK. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 2 Under Names. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. select Site Plan. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Floor Plans.

27 Create additional levels as needed. duplicate. To orient the 3D view to another view. and. click Schedule/Quantities. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. To orient the 3D view to a direction. ceiling plans. If prompted. 31 Rename the 3D View. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. notice that you have the option to rename. use the ViewCube. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . duplicate. (Default 3D View). right-click the ViewCube. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view.Notice the level names. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. click Orient to View. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. right-click the view name. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and select the desired view. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click the ViewCube. 23 To add more levels to the template. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the ViewCube. and click Save View. or delete this view. or delete them as needed. a face. click 29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. If it does not display. 21 In the Project Browser. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 22 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. select Make Plan View. click Orient to a Direction. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. If you want to modify view properties. Black level heads have no associated views. and elevations. review the floor plans. or an edge of the ViewCube. on the View toolbar. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and select the desired direction. right-click {3D}. in the Project Browser. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. enter a view name. By default. expand 3D Views. click Level. right-click Level 1. under 3D Views. review the existing floor plans. Rename.

and click OK.txt for AutoCAD. click Sheet. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. assign filters. To later add a title block to a sheet. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 42 Create new sheets as needed. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. modify settings as needed. select the default title block. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and modify their properties accordingly. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. click Add View. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. modify settings as needed. 40 To add views to the sheet. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. expand Sheets (all). 41 To rename or renumber the sheet.txt for MicroStation). You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards.You can add schedules to a template. You can still add views to the sheet. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. On the Appearance tab. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select a view. on the View tab of the Design Bar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Filter tab. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Right-click the sheet name. After the sheet is created. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. in the Project Browser. select and order required fields. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. On the Formatting tab. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. select one. and click OK. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. and click OK. select the category type. select the title block and delete it. or exportlayersdgn. modify settings as needed. You are prompted to select a title block. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Rename. 37 Click OK. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. To do so. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. for example. You can save these mappings to a text file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and so on. name the file. 9 Click Save As. 5 For each category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. For example.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. and click Save. and click Save. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. select Save As. click Save As. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 2 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. These settings are retained within the project template. Using shared parameters. and so on. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. When scheduling. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. project parameters. 8 In the dialog. therefore. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and click Save. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. doors. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. windows. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. They cannot be shared with other projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. name the file. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and they become the set mappings for the project.

This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. because each office has a unique set of needs. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you can create a list of parameters. 22 Click OK. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. project parameters. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 23 Add project parameters as needed. For each parameter group. 9 Name the parameter. select a parameter value type. 10 Click OK. 26 Click OK. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. for Name. you may want to save the file to a network location. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 14 Click Add. click New. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 16 Under Parameter Data. 17 Under Discipline. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. and select Shared Parameter. select Project parameter. 2 Click Create. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 5 Enter the group name. 18 Under Type of Parameter. add required parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 25 Click Select. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 8 Under Parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select a parameter discipline type. 19 Under Group parameter under. and click OK. click New. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 11 For each parameter group. and specify its discipline and type. select a group to add parameters to. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. under Groups. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. enter a parameter name. 3 Name and save the file. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 21 Under Categories. click Add.

36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. By creating named settings within the template. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. For information on creating multi-category tags. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. By going first to the Print command. and click OK. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. For each printer. 37 When you have completed the schedule. The tag is now part of the template. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 2 Under Printer. you create named print settings. and make it your default template file. 32 Navigate to the directory. you can load them into the template. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 34 For Category. click OK. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. 4 Modify the printer settings. and click Open. you need only select a setting. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. or refer to the online help. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. In this exercise. 28 Click OK. enter a name for the schedule. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. you can set options such as sheet sizes. select Multi-Category. save the file as a template. and print. paper placement. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. make minor modifications if necessary. select the tag. and the percent of actual size. 35 For Name. 6 In the New dialog. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 5 Click Save As. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. click Setup. 3 Under Settings. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer.

select Template Files (*. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 24 Navigate to the template location. By investing the time to individualize your template. In addition. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. This can provide a good starting point for a template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 9 In the Print dialog. click Setup. 25 Click OK. select it. save it in a network location. The only remaining task is to save it. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.rte). In addition. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and click Save. select a different printer. and click Open. 19 Select the template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can also set this template as your default template. you modified settings. loaded components. enter a new name for the printer. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 23 For Default template file. Your template is complete. If you need to share this file with others.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and saved them to a template. click Browse. In this lesson. 11 Click Close when finished. Create additional settings as needed. 18 Click Browse. click Save as. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. If you have a project. and create new settings for this printer. 14 Under Save as type. 20 Click OK. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Click the File Locations tab. modify the printer settings. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 15 Name the template. and click Open. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful